OptiX OSN 550 V100R006C01 Product Description V1.1 (20121031)

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service Transmission System V100R006C01
CPE
Optical
Product Description
Issue Date
01 2012-10-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: Email: http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description
About This Document
About This Document

Product Version
The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation. Product Name OptiX OSN 550 iManager U2000 Product Version V100R006C01 V100R008C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in terms of network application, functions, hardware structure, software architecture, features, and technical specifications. This document is intended for:

Network planning engineers Data configuration engineers System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Alerts you to a high risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in serious injury or death. Alerts you to a medium or low risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in moderate or minor injury. Alerts you to a potentially hazardous situation that could, if not avoided, result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
ii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points in the main text.
GUI Conventions
Convention Boldface > Meaning Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

This document is the first issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue 1 of product version V100R006C00, this issue incorporates the following updates:

Added the 1x10GE Ethernet processing board EX1. Added the 4xchannelized STM-1 service processing board CQ1. Updated the service access capability of the equipment according to the new boards. Optimized the structure and related description of the "Product Positioning and Features", "Quicklook", "Networking and Application Scenarios" sections.
Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

This issue is used for first office application (FOA) of V100R006C00.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
iii
Contents
Contents
About This Document .................................................................................................................... ii 1 Product Positioning and Features .............................................................................................. 1
1.1 Product Positioning .......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Product Features ............................................................................................................................................... 2
2 Quick Reference ............................................................................................................................ 5 3 System Architecture and Service Access ................................................................................ 16

3.1 System Architecture ....................................................................................................................................... 16 3.2 Service Types ................................................................................................................................................. 18 3.2.1 Types of Supported Services ................................................................................................................. 18 3.2.2 Access Capacities .................................................................................................................................. 20
4 Product Features .......................................................................................................................... 22

4.1 Services Supported ......................................................................................................................................... 22 4.1.1 Service Overview (Packet).................................................................................................................... 22 4.1.2 Service Overview (TDM) ..................................................................................................................... 29 4.2 Redundancy and Protection ............................................................................................................................ 35 4.2.1 Equipment Level Protection.................................................................................................................. 35 4.2.2 Network Level Protection (Packet) ....................................................................................................... 36 4.2.3 Network Level Protection (TDM) ......................................................................................................... 48 4.3 Synchronization.............................................................................................................................................. 55 4.3.1 Requirements for Clock Synchronization ............................................................................................. 55 4.3.2 Clock and Time Synchronization (Packet) ............................................................................................ 56 4.3.3 Clock Synchronization (TDM) ............................................................................................................. 64
5 Hardware and Structure............................................................................................................. 66

5.1 Chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 66 5.1.1 Chassis Structure ................................................................................................................................... 66 5.1.2 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (Packet) ............................................................................... 69 5.1.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (TDM) ................................................................................. 71 5.2 Outdoor Cabinet ............................................................................................................................................. 72 5.3 Board Category .............................................................................................................................................. 72
6 Networking and Application Scenarios ................................................................................. 79
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
iv
Contents
6.1 Basic Network Topologies ............................................................................................................................. 79 6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking .................................................................................................... 80 6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking ............................................................................................ 85 6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking ...................................................................................................... 91
7 Network Management System ................................................................................................. 95

7.1 Network Management .................................................................................................................................... 95 7.2 DCN Management ......................................................................................................................................... 97 7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs ................................................................................................. 98
8 Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................... 101

8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet) ..................................................................................................................... 104 8.1.1 TP-Assist ............................................................................................................................................. 104 8.1.2 MPLS OAM ........................................................................................................................................ 106 8.1.3 MPLS-TP OAM .................................................................................................................................. 107 8.1.4 ETH-OAM .......................................................................................................................................... 107 8.1.5 ATM OAM .......................................................................................................................................... 109 8.1.6 RMON ................................................................................................................................................ 109 8.1.7 PRBS................................................................................................................................................... 110 8.1.8 CES Alarm Transmission .................................................................................................................... 110 8.1.9 Port Mirroring ..................................................................................................................................... 112 8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM) ....................................................................................................................... 113 8.2.1 PRBS................................................................................................................................................... 113 8.2.2 ETH-OAM .......................................................................................................................................... 113 8.2.3 RMON ................................................................................................................................................ 113 8.2.4 Data Test Frame .................................................................................................................................. 114 8.3 Upgrade Methods ......................................................................................................................................... 114
9 Security Management............................................................................................................... 116

9.1 Authentication Management ........................................................................................................................ 116 9.2 Authorization Management .......................................................................................................................... 117 9.3 Network Security Management .................................................................................................................... 117 9.4 System Security Management ...................................................................................................................... 118 9.5 Log Management ......................................................................................................................................... 119
10 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................ 121

10.1 General Specifications................................................................................................................................ 122 10.2 Packet Performance Indicators ................................................................................................................... 123 10.3 TDM Performance Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 130 10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ........................................................................................ 132 10.5 Optical Port Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 133 10.6 Colored Optical Ports ................................................................................................................................. 142 10.7 Electrical Port Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 145 10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications...................................................................................................................... 149
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Contents
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation ...................................................................................................................... 151 10.10 Safety Certification .................................................................................................................................. 157 10.11 Environmental Specifications ................................................................................................................... 157 10.11.1 Storage Environment ....................................................................................................................... 158 10.11.2 Transportation Environment ............................................................................................................ 160 10.11.3 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed in a Cabinet) ........................................ 162 10.11.4 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed on a Wall) ............................................ 166
11 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection .................................................................. 171 12 Standard Compliance ............................................................................................................. 172
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations ........................................................................................................................... 172 12.2 IETF Standards ........................................................................................................................................... 176 12.3 IEEE Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 178 12.4 Environment Related Standards ................................................................................................................. 179 12.5 MEF Standards ........................................................................................................................................... 181 12.6 Safety Standards ......................................................................................................................................... 181 12.7 EMC Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 182 12.8 Protection Standards ................................................................................................................................... 183
A Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... 184
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
vi
1 Product Positioning and Features
Product Positioning and Features
About This Chapter

With the increasing number of packet services, conventional time division multiplexing (TDM) devices cannot meet packet service transmission demands. The OptiX OSN 550 supports a variety of service network topologies in the TDM and packet domains, able to meet customers' various service development demands. 1.1 Product Positioning This section describes product positioning and networking application. 1.2 Product Features This section describes the equipment features in terms of architecture and technology.
1.1 Product Positioning

This section describes product positioning and networking application. The OptiX OSN 550 is a packet- and TDM-oriented new-generation multi-service CPE optical transmission system, which is positioned at the access layer among Huawei's end-to-end Hybrid multi-service transmission platform (MSTP) product series. This system is characterized by its large capacity, high availability, low power consumption, and compact structure. The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiprotocol label switching (MPLS), MPLS-transport profile (MPLS-TP), pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3), Ethernet, ATM, WDM, SDH, and PDH technologies. With these technologies, a pure TDM network, pure PTN network, or Hybrid network can be provisioned. As the access layer equipment, the OptiX OSN 550 is networked with other OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete solution covering the backbone layer, aggregation layer, and access layer. The complete solution meets 2G/3G/LTE base station backhaul and enterprise leased service access demands. Figure 1-1 illustrates the network application of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Figure 1-1 Network application of the OptiX OSN 550

Access layer Convergence node Convergence/Backbo ne layer
E1/FE/GE ATM/IMA E1 E1/T1 E1/STM-1 FE ATM/IMA E1/GE
E1/FE/GE
E1/T1 FE
OptiX OSN 550
OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
Enterprise leased service
NodeB
BTS
RNC
BSC
1.2 Product Features

This section describes the equipment features in terms of architecture and technology.
Large Capacity, High Availability, Low Power Consumption, and Compact Structure
The OptiX OSN 550 is access layer equipment, which features large capacity, high availability, low power consumption, and compact structure. The OptiX OSN 550 supports:

A maximum of 60 Gbit/s packet switching capacity, a maximum of 20 Gbit/s SDH cross-connect capacity, and a maximum of four 10GE ports 1+1 protection for system control, switching, timing, and power supply units, and network-level protection such as MPLS APS, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS), link aggregation group (LAG), link-state pass through (LPT), subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), and multiplex section protection (MSP) A maximum power consumption of 240 W, and a typical power consumption of only 149 W Dimensions (H x W x D) of 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm
Universal Switch Architecture and Multi-service Transmission

The OptiX OSN 550 has a universal switch architecture, as shown in Figure 1-2. The OptiX OSN 550 supports coexistence of the time division multiplexing (TDM) domain and packet transport network (PTN) domain, which achieves smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the PTN domain while allowing the on-demand configuration and application of pure TDM services and packet services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Figure 1-2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 550

PWE3 Packet Switch Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Packet equipment architecture
+
TDM TDM Cross-connect EoS STM-N STM-N TDM equipment architecture
TDM/EoS Ethernet PWE3
TDM Crossconnect
STM-N Hybrid MSTP architecture Ethernet
Packet Switch
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the access and transmission of PDH, SDH, ATM, Ethernet, MPLS, and MPLS-TP services. In the PTN domain, the OptiX OSN 550 performs highly efficient statistical multiplexing of data services to reduce the service transport cost per bit. In the TDM domain, the OptiX OSN 550 incorporates SDH functions to ensure the high transport quality of Native TDM services (mainly voice services).
End-to-End Service Configuration, One-Click Commissioning, and One-Click Fault Locating (TP-Assist)
Compared with legacy TDM networks, PTN networks have the following characteristics in terms of O&M:

Lack of overheads indicating the physical states of networks. When a fault occurs on a PTN network, no visual and fast indicator is available to locate the fault. Networking diversity and complication, which require powerful O&M capabilities
To address those issues, the equipment uses the TP-Assist to provide more O&M means and simplify O&M operations for PTN networks during installation, commissioning, service configuration, fault locating, and routine maintenance. With the TP-Assist, PTN networks have the SDH-like O&M capabilities, which reduce the technical requirements for O&M personnel and improve O&M efficiency.
Hierarchical OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions and have the SDH-like O&M capabilities. It can quickly detect and locate faults at each layer. The hierarchical OAM functions include ETH-OAM, MPLS tunnel/PW OAM, and MPLS-TP tunnel/PW OAM. Figure 1-3 shows the application of hierarchical OAM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Figure 1-3 Application of hierarchical OAM

P P
PE1 CE1
PE2 CE3
CE2 P Ethernet Port OAM ETH Layer PW Layer Tunnel Layer MEP MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM MEP MPLS/MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM MEP MIP MIP MEP MEP Ethernet Service OAM P
CE4
Ethernet Port OAM MEP
OptiX OSN 550/500
Strong Environmental Adaptability

The OptiX OSN 550 can be mounted in an ETSI or 19-inch cabinet, APM30H outdoor cabinet, or open rack, or on a wall or desk. The OptiX OSN 550 supports the -48 V/-60 V DC power supply, 110 V/220 V AC power supply, and uninterruptible power module (UPM) power supply. The UPM offers the storage battery protection function and can feed 3-4 hours' power in the case of a commercial power outage. The OptiX OSN 550 can operate at a high temperature. Extended operating temperature: -5C to 65C
Extreme operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours every day and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2 Quick Reference
2
Table 2-1 lists the overview of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 2-1 Overview of the OptiX OSN 550 Item Appearan ce Description
Quick Reference
This chapter describes the product overview, including product photos, hardware, software, and functions and features.
Chassis dimensions (H x W x D): 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm
Board
System control, switching, and timing boards: CXL and PCX Packet processing boards: CQ1, EF8F, EG4C, EM6F, EM6T, EX1, and MD1 SDH boards: SL1D, SL1Q, and SL4D PDH boards: PL3T and SP3D EoS boards: EFS8 and EGT1 MDM board: DMD2 Auxiliary boards: AUX and FAN Power supply boards: APIU, PIU, and UPM
For services and ports supported by the preceding boards, see Table 5-4. Packet functions and features TDM functions and features See Table 2-2.
See Table 2-3.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2 Quick Reference
Item Packet switching capacity TDM cross-con nect capacity Equipmen t-level protection
Description 60 Gbit/s
Higher order cross-connect capacity: 20 Gbit/s Lower order cross-connect capacity: 5 Gbit/s
1+1 backup for power supply 1+1 backup between active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards Fan protection (The failure in a single fan does not affect the operation of the other fans.)
Intelligent fan speed adjustmen t Managem ent ports and auxiliary ports
Supports the automatic adjustment of fan speed based on the highest temperature of the board in the chassis.
Interface Type External clock port
Description 120-ohm external clock port, which can work in 2048 kbit/s mode or 2048 kHz mode Two external time input/output ports Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet: The equipment provides one port for monitoring and managing an outdoor cabinet. Power supply port connecting to two -48/-60 V DC power supplies Two 110 V/220 V AC power supply ports
Connector RJ45
External time port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
RJ45 RJ45
Power supply port
2 mm HM connector
Three-phase socket RJ45
Network management port
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port, which is connected to a network management system (NMS) 6-input/2-output alarm port
Alarm input/output port
RJ45
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port Orderwire phone port One 64 kbit/s synchronous serial port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous serial port, which transparently transmits one channel of data services Used to provide voice communication for operation/maintenance engineers at different workstations. RJ45
RJ45
Table 2-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet functions and features Item MPLS function s Description The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement MPLS/MPLS-TP functions.

Setup mode: static tunnels Protection: 1:1 tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM): supports MPLS tunnel OAM and multiprotocol label switching transfer profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM. MPLS tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
PWE3 function s
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement PWE3 functions.
Service categories

TDM PWE3 services (circuit emulation services [CESs]) Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) PWE3 services ETH PWE3 services
Setup mode: static pseudo wires (PWs) Supports single-segment PWs (SS-PWs) and multi-segment PWs (MS-PWs). PW encapsulation mode: raw mode or tagged mode PW control word: supported by the PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB board whose printed circuit board (PCB) version is Ver.B and the PCXLX/PCXX board. Protection: 1:1 PW APS OAM: supports MPLS PW OAM and MPLS-TP PW OAM. MPLS PW OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP PW OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Packet system performa nce Service
See Table 10-2.
Service Category
Maximum
Service Port
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description Receiving Capability Ethernet service:

Description 10/100BASE-T (X)
Connector RJ-45 LC
Supports the MPLS technology. Supports the VLAN technology. Supports the QinQ technology. Supports E-Line services based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT+VLAN+VLAN Pri, PORT+QinQ, and PWE3. Supports Native E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge, IEEE 802.1q bridge, and IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Supports E-LAN services based on PWE3 (VPLS services). Supports the following Ethernet data frame formats: IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet II. Supports jumbo frames. Supports the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of 960 to 9600 bytes (1620 bytes by default).
FE (electrical port): 36 FE (optical port): 48
100BASE-B X 100BASE-F X 100BASE-L X 100BASE-V X 100BASE-Z X 1000BASESX 1000BASELX 1000BASEVX 1000BASEZX
GE (optical port): 22
LC
GE (electrical port): 20 10GE (optical ports): 4
1000BASE-T
RJ-45 LC
10GBASESR (LAN) 10GBASESW (WAN) 10GBASELR (LAN) 10GBASELW (WAN) 10GBASEER (LAN) 10GBASEEW (WAN) 10GBASEZR (LAN) 10GBASEZW (WAN) ATM/IMA/ E1: 75/120ohm smart E1
E1 service:
Service types:
ATM/IMA/ E1: 192xE1 Channelize d STM-1:
ATM/IMA/E1 : Anea 96 Channelized STM-1: LC
TDM PWE3 (CES E1)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description

ATM PWE3 Fractional CES E1 ML_PPP E1 CESoPSN SAToP
24xSTM-1
port Channelized STM-1: S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 optical ports and STM-1 SFP electrical port
optical port and SAA straight female
Encapsulation formats:

Compression of idle timeslots: supported only for CESoPSN encapsulation E1 coding format: HDB3 L/M/R bit processing: supported for CES services CES ACR: supported 192xE1
ATM/IMA service:

Supports ATM PWE3 services. Supports ATM traffic management. Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:

75/120-ohm smart E1 port
Anea 96
N-to-one VPC N-to-one VCC One-to-one VPC One-to-one VCC
Supports a maximum of 31 concatenated ATM cells. Supports the following ATM OAM: F4 (VP layer) and F5 (VC layer). Supports inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA). Complies with the ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131 standards.

Protecti on
Tunnel APS
Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration: 50 ms (two tunnel APS protection groups, each carrying 16 PWs)
NOTE Tunnel APS and PW APS share 64 protection group resources.
MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS-TP tunnel APS share 64 protection group resources.
PW APS
Complies with the ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131 standards.

Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Maximum number of members bound into a PW: 512 Switching duration: 50 ms (one protection pair containing eight members, six PW APS protection groups)
NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description

Tunnel APS and PW APS share 64 protection group resources. MPLS PW APS and MPLS-TP PW APS share 64 protection group resources.
MSTP
Complies with the IEEE 802.1s standard.

Maximum number of instances per port: 1 Maximum number of port groups: 1 Maximum number of ports provided by all port groups: 16
ERPS
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.

Maximum number of protection groups: 8 Switching duration: 50 ms at an optical port and 2s at an electrical port if the number of nodes on a ring network is not more than 16 and the link is faulty bidirectionally
NOTE Only Native ETH services support ERPS.
LPT
Complies with the Huawei proprietary protocol.

Maximum number of services that support LPT: 16 Point-point and point-multipoint LPT Switching duration:

300 ms if the fault is on the NNI side and is detected using PW OAM 300 ms at an optical port and 3s at an electrical port if the fault is on the UNI side
LAG
Complies with the IEEE 802.3ad standard.

LAG protection A maximum of 16 LAGs. Each LAG has a maximum of eight members. Switching duration:

Manual/Static LAG: 50 ms at an optical port and 2s at an electrical port if the link is interrupted bidirectionally Static LAG: 3s if the link is interrupted unidirectionally
ML-PPP
Complies with the IETF RFC 1661 and IETF RFC 1990 standards.

Total number of PPP links: 504 Number of ML-PPP groups: 64 Number of member links in an ML-PPP group: 16
LMSP
Complies with the ITU-T G.841 and ITU-T G.842 standards.

Number of protection groups: 8 Protection switching time: 50 ms Tunnel OAM and PW OAM MPLS OAM: supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Ping, and Traceroute. MPLS-TP OAM: supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, PW LM, LCK,
Mainten ance
MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM
Complies with the ITU-T Y.1711 and ITU-T G.8113.1 standards.

Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
10
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description TST (packet loss test only), PW CSF, and two-way DM.
Maximum sum of the number of tunnels supporting OAM and the number of PWs supporting OAM: 128
NOTE The sum of the number of tunnels supporting OAM and the number of PWs supporting OAM must not exceed 128.
The sum of the number of tunnels supporting MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM and the number of PWs supporting MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM must not exceed 128.
ETH-OAM
Complies with the IEEE 802.3ah and IEEE 802.1ag standards.
Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC), loopback (LB), linktrace (LT), alarm indication signal (AIS), loss measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM). Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault detection, remote loopback, and self-loop detection and looped-port blocking. Maximum number of MDs/MAs/MEP/MIPs: 64
NOTE ETH-OAM and MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM share 128 OAM resources.
Only the E-Line service transmitted in native Ethernet mode supports ETH-LM and ETH-DM. LM/DM are based on IEEE 802.1ag, implemented by referring to the ITU-T Y.1731 standard.
ATM OAM RMON
Supports the following ATM OAM functions: CC, LB, RDI, and AIS. Supports port-level and service-level RMON functions, in compliance with RFC 2819. Supports four RMON management groups: Ethernet statistics group, Ethernet history group, Ethernet alarm group, and Ethernet history control group. Port level:

Basic Ethernet performance Extended Ethernet performance L2VPN (private line service) Transit tunnel PW
Service level:

SNMP Port mirroring
Queries port information and port/service performance statistics using a standard SNMP terminal. Supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service analysis and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services.

Supports local port mirroring. Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port. Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports. Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress direction of a UNI port.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
11
2 Quick Reference
Item Synchro nization
Description Synchronous Ethernet clock
Synchronous Ethernet clock that complies with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.8262. Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks: FE/GE/10GE Clock source selection algorithm based on the synchronization status message (SSM) protocol Clock frequency stability (holdover mode): < 50 ppb
NOTE SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks. When working in 10BASE-T mode, FE/GE ports do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
IEEE 1588v2
Supports the OC, BC, TC, and BC+TC clock models. The TC model can work in two modes: E2E TC and P2P TC. Supports the delay deviation compensation for line transmission in two modes: length deviation compensation and time deviation compensation. The length deviation compensation value ranges from 0 m to 12000 m, and the time deviation compensation value ranges from 0 ns to 65535 ns. Supports two 1PPS+ToD or DCLS external time ports, which use the RS-422 level. Each port supports compensation for propagation delay on its connected cable. The compensation can be set to a value ranging from 0 s to 10 s in steps of 10 ns or less. ToD supports cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs). Supports the setting of the input/output mode at time ports.
NOTE A port in 10GE WAN mode does not support IEEE 1588v2.
IEEE 1588 ACR
The IEEE 1588 ACR slave recovers synchronous clocks from IEEE 1588 packets. The quality level of IEEE 1588 ACR clocks can be converted into that of synchronous Ethernet clocks.
NOTE A port in 10GE WAN mode does not support IEEE 1588 ACR.
CES ACR
Supports the clock recovery function in absolute mode. Maximum number of CES ACR clocks: 24 The clock performance complies with the ITU-T G.823 Traffic template. DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Others
QoS
Complex traffic classification Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
12
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
QoS policies Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies. Access control list (ACL) policy Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI ingresses.
Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Congestion management Supports tail drop and WRED dropping. Queue scheduling policies Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Table 2-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features Item Service Description Service Category Maximum Receiving Capability 26xSTM-1 Service Port Description
Connector
SDH service
S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports STM-1 SFP electrical ports
optical port: LC Electrical port: SAA straight female
14xSTM-4
S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports E1 (75/120-ohm) /T1 (100-ohm)
LC
2xSTM-16
LC
PDH service
252xE1/T1
Anea 96
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
13
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description electrical ports 18xE3/T3 E3 (75-ohm)/T3 (75-ohm) electrical ports 10/100BASET(X)
SMB
Ethernet service:
48xFE 6xGE
RJ45 LC
Ethernet private line (EPL) services Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge) Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1q and 802.1ad bridges)

1000BAS E-SX/LX/ VX/ZX 1000BAS E-T
Protection
SNCP
SNCP at the VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration: 50 ms Ring MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration: 50 ms Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 linear MSP protection groups: 13 Switching duration: 50 ms
Ring MSP
Linear MSP
Maintena nce
PRBS Port mirroring
Supported EFS8 supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services.

Supports local port mirroring. Supports ingress and egress port mirroring.
Synchroni zation
Physical layer clocks:
Including external clocks, line clocks, tributary clocks, and internal clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port). Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
14
2 Quick Reference
Item
Description SSM protocols

Tributary retiming and transparent transmission of tributary clocks Locked mode, holdover mode, and free-run mode
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
15
3 System Architecture and Service Access
System Architecture and Service Access
About This Chapter

The chapter describes the equipment's system architecture and service access. 3.1 System Architecture
The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (TDM and packet domains) device. This section describes its functional units and the relationship between these units. 3.2 Service Types
This section describes the maximum service access capabilities, service ports, and boards providing specific service types for the OptiX OSN 550.
3.1 System Architecture

The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (TDM and packet domains) device. This section describes its functional units and the relationship between these units. The OptiX OSN 550 consists of the following functional units: service interface unit, TDM cross-connect unit, packet switching unit, system control and communication unit, clock unit, auxiliary interface unit, fan unit, and power supply unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
16
Figure 3-1 System architecture of OptiX OSN 550
TDM crossconnect unit VC-4 signal FE/GE/10GE

E1 (CES/ATM/IMA)
Power supply unit Packet switching unit
-48 V/-60 V DC 110 V/220 V AC
Fan unit
Ethernet signal Clock unit External clock
STM-1/4/16 E1 (TDM)/T1/E3/T3 NMS
Service interface unit
Auxiliary interface unit
Orderwire External alarm Synchronous/Asynchronous data
DCN
System control and communication unit Backplane
Optical/Electrical service Control and communication bus & Clock bus
Cross-connect bus
Table 3-1 Function units of the OptiX OSN 550 Function Unit Service interface unit Function

Receives/Transmits TDM E1/T1/E3/T3 signals. Receives/Transmits ATM/IMA E1 signals. Receives/Transmits STM-1/4/16 signals. Receives/Transmits Ethernet signals. Performs E1/channelized STM-1/ATM/Ethernet PWE3 emulation. Provides the cross-connect function and grooms TDM services. Processes Ethernet services and forwards packets. Processes MPLS labels and forwards packets. Processes PW labels and forwards packets. Performs system communication and control.
TDM cross-connect unit Packet switching unit
System control and
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
17
Function Unit communication unit
Function

Configures and manages the system. Collects alarms and monitors performance. Processes overhead bytes. Traces clock sources and provides clock signals for the system. Provides the input/output port for external clocks. Provides the orderwire phone port. Provides the synchronous/asynchronous data port. Provides the external alarm input/output port. Connects to -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies. Connects to 110 V to 220 V AC power supplies. Cools the NE.
Clock unit
Auxiliary interface unit
Power supply unit
Fan unit
3.2 Service Types

This section describes the maximum service access capabilities, service ports, and boards providing specific service types for the OptiX OSN 550.
3.2.1 Types of Supported Services

Different boards providing a wide variety of service ports can be deployed on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 3-2 lists the services supported by the OptiX OSN 550. Table 3-2 Types of supported services Servi ce Cate gory Packe t Service Type Service Rate Board Reference Standard
10 GE LAN service 10 GE WAN service GE service (optical port) GE service (electrical port)
10.31 Gbit/s 9.95 Gbit/s
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1 PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
IEEE 802.3ae
1000 Mbit/s
PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXG B/EM6F/EG4C EM6T/EM6F/EG4C
IEEE 802.3z
1000 Mbit/s
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
18
Servi ce Cate gory
Service Type
Service Rate
Board
Reference Standard
FE service (optical port) FE service (electrical port) ATM/IMA/ E1 CES service Channelize d STM-1 CES service
100 Mbit/s
EF8F/EM6F/EG4C
IEEE 802.3u
10/100 Mbit/s 2.048 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s
EM6T/EM6F
MD1
ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.823
CQ1
ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.842 IETF RFC 1661 IETF RFC 1990
SDH
STM-1 standard service STM-4 standard or concatenati on service STM-16 standard or concatenati on service
155.52 Mbit/s 622.08 Mbit/s
SL1D/SL1Q/PCXLX/P CXLG/CXL1 SL4D/PCXLX/PCXLG/ CXL4
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.691 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.693 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.825
2.5 Gbit/s
PCXLX/PCXLG/CXL1 6
PDH
E1 service
2.048 Mbit/s
SP3D
ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.823 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.824 ITU-T G.742
T1 service
1.544 Mbit/s
SP3D
ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.823 ITU-T G.824 ITU-T G.783
T3 service
44.736 Mbit/s 34.368
PL3T
E3 service
PL3T
ITU-T G.703
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
19
Servi ce Cate gory
Service Type
Service Rate
Board
Reference Standard
Mbit/s EoS FE service GE service FE: Fast Ethernet GE: Gigabit Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s 1000 Mbit/s EFS8 EGT1
ITU-T G.823 IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z
3.2.2 Access Capacities

This section describes access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550.
Access Capacity in Packet Mode

Table 3-3 lists access capacities in packet mode when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 3-3 Access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in packet mode Board 10GE (Optica l Port) 4 4 2 0 2 GE (Optica l Port) 20 20 22 22 22 GE (Electri cal Port) 20 20 20 20 20 FE (Optica l Port) 48 48 48 48 48 FE (Electri cal Port) 36 36 36 36 36 ATM/I MA/E1 CES 192 192 192 192 192 Channe lized STM-1 CES 24 24 24 24 24
PCXLX PCXX PCXLG PCXGA PCXGB
Access Capacity in TDM Mode

Table 3-4 lists access capacities in TDM mode when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 3-4 Access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM mode Board PCXLX STM-1 26 STM-4 14 STM-16 2 E1/T1 252 E3/T3 18 FE 48 GE 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
20
Board PCXX PCXLG PCXGA PCXGB CXL1 CXL4 CXL16
STM-1 24 26 24 24 26 24 24
STM-4 12 14 12 12 12 14 12
STM-16 0 2 0 0 0 0 2
E1/T1 252 252 252 252 252 252 252
E3/T3 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
FE 48 48 48 48 48 48 48
GE 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
21
4 Product Features
4
About This Chapter
4.1 Services Supported 4.2 Redundancy and Protection
Product Features
This chapter describes equipment features in terms of available service types, protection, and synchronization.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet services, ATM/IMA/E1 services, channelized STM-1, EoS services, SDH services, and PDH services.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiple redundancy and protection schemes. 4.3 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 550 supports IEEE 1588v2, synchronous Ethernet clock, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit/s clocks and can provide an end-to-end clock transport solution when deployed with MSTP or PTN products.
4.1 Services Supported

The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet services, ATM/IMA/E1 services, channelized STM-1, EoS services, SDH services, and PDH services.
4.1.1 Service Overview (Packet)

This section describes the packet service types supported by the equipment.
Ethernet Services (E-Line and E-LAN)

The OptiX OSN 550 supports point-to-point E-Line services and multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services. Standardization organizations such as ITU-T, IETF and MEF stipulate the model frames for L2 Ethernet services. Table 4-1 lists these model frames. In this document, the L2 Ethernet services are of the model frame stipulated by MEF.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
22
4 Product Features
Table 4-1 Comparison among L2 Ethernet services stipulation Service Type Service Multiplex ing Physically isolated VLAN Transport Tunnel Physically isolated VLAN MPLS Physically isolated VLAN Physically isolated Physically isolated VLAN MPLS IETF Model VPWS VPLS EPLAN EVPLAN E-LAN ITU-T Model EPL EVPL MEF Model E-Line
Poin t-topoin t serv ice Mul tipoi nt-to -mul tipoi nt serv ice
Line Virtual Line
LAN Virtual LAN
Table 4-2 lists the E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the OptiX OSN 550. Table 4-2 E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the OptiX OSN 550 Service E-Line Native Ethernet services Service Type Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service VLAN-based E-Line services QinQ-based E-Line services ETH PWE3 services E-LAN Native Ethernet services E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ETH PWE3 services E-LAN services carried by PWs
E-Line Service
Figure 4-1 illustrates the E-Line service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment. Company A has two branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has two branches in City 2 and City 3. Company C has two branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Companies A, B, and C require data communication. The OptiX OSN equipment can separately provide a
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
23
4 Product Features
private line service for Companies A, B, and C to meet the communication requirement. In addition, the service data is completely isolated. Figure 4-1 E-Line service
Metro carrier Ethernet Company A
Nationwide/Global carrier Ethernet
Metro carrier Ethernet Company A
Company C City 1
Metro carrier Ethernet
Company B City 3
E-Line1 E-Line2 E-Line3
City 2 Company C Company B
E-LAN Service
Figure 4-2 illustrates the E-LAN service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment. Company Z is headquartered in City 3. Branch A of the company is located in City 1 and City 2, and Branch B of the company is located in City 1, City 2, and City 3. Branch A and Branch B do not communicate with each other, and the data of them should be separated from each other. The headquarters, however, need to communicate with all the branches and need to access the Internet. The OptiX OSN equipment can be used to provide the E-LAN service. Different VLAN tags are used to identify service data from different branches. In this manner, the headquarters can communicate with the branches and the data from different branches is isolated. In addition, the VLAN is used to isolate the Internet data accessed by the headquarters from the internal service data.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
24
4 Product Features
Figure 4-2 E-LAN service
ISP
Metro carrier Ethernet Branch B
Nationwide/Global carrier Ethernet Headquarter
Metro carrier Ethernet Branch A City 1 Metro carrier Ethernet Branch B City 3
VLAN1 VLAN2 VLAN3
City 2 Branch A Branch B Branch A
CES Services
The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across the pure packet mode. At the physical layer on the UNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with a CE through the following physical channels for accessing CES services:

Channelized STM-1 E1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
25
4 Product Features
Figure 4-3 Networking diagram of the CES
Emulation Mode
The OptiX NG-SDH series equipment supports two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) CES and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP) CES. In the case of CESoPSN CES:

The equipment senses the frame format, frame alignment mode, and timeslot information in the TDM circuit. The equipment processes the overheads and extracts the payloads in TDM frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a certain sequence. As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP CES:
The equipment does not sense any format in the TDM signal. Instead, it considers TDM signals as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM signals is emulated. The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
Service Type
CES services are classified into UNI-UNI CES services and UNI-UNI CES services by service implementation point.
UNI-UNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-4, a single OptiX OSN NE completes access of TDM services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
26
4 Product Features
Figure 4-4 UNI-UNI CES services
PSN
NE TDM link BTS
BSC
UNI-NNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-5, the OptiX OSN NEs set UNI-NNI CES services. In the case of a UNI-NNI CES service, the OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through E1 ports; CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate end-to-end TDM services.
Figure 4-5 UNI-NNI CES services

NE BTS1
NE PSN BSC
NE TDM link BTS2 PW Tunnel
ATM/IMA Services
The OptiX OSN equipment supports ATM/IMA services in packet mode.
ATM Services
ATM stands for asynchronous transfer mode, which is implemented based on cells. In ATM mode, the ATM PWE3 technology is used to emulate ATM services on a packet switched network (PSN). Therefore, traditional ATM services can traverse the PSN. ATM service
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
27
4 Product Features
networks can be classified into three types: one-to-one, N-to-one or ATM-TRANS, according to the encapsulation mode of ATM PWE3 packets. Figure 4-6 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in one-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
Figure 4-7 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in N-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a PW must be the same.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
28
4 Product Features
IMA Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology multiplexes multiple low-speed ATM links into a high-speed link. The IMA technology provides inverse multiplexing of an ATM cell stream over multiple low-speed links and retrieves the original stream at the far-end from these physical links. Figure 4-8 shows how IMA transmits services. Figure 4-8 IMA transmission
Link 1 Link 2 ATM cell stream Link 3 ATM cell stream
IMA group
The IMA technology helps to group multiple physical links to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. When the member links in the IMA group are dynamically added/deleted, or fail/recover, the logical link changes only in bandwidth. The services on the logical link are not interrupted only when the bandwidth of the logical link is not lower than the required minimum bandwidth. With the IMA technology, the transport network can transmit ATM services from customer equipment on an IMA group formed by multiple low-speed links (for example, the three E1 links shown in Figure 4-9), therefore increasing link bandwidth utilization and providing link protection. Figure 4-9 Application of the IMA technology
IMA group
NodeB
E1 link Packet transmit equipment
4.1.2 Service Overview (TDM)

This section describes the TDM service types supported by the equipment.
Ethernet Services (EPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN)

ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly supports service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following types of Ethernet services:
EPL Service
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
29

4 Product Features
EVPL Service EPLAN Service EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 4-10, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services. Figure 4-10 EPL service based on port
B PORT2 PORT1 A VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 PORT2 POTR1 A B
NE 1 OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user
NE 2
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 4-11, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Company A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
30
4 Product Features
Figure 4-11 Port-shared EVPL services

Headquarters of company A VCTRUNK1 VLAN100 VLAN200 PORT1 VCTRUNK2 Department 1 VLAN100 PORT1 VLAN200 PORT2 Department 2
NE 1
NE 2
OptiX OSN equipment
Enterprise user
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN equipment adopts three ways to realize convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 4-12. EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 4-13. EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 4-14. Figure 4-12 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
B VLAN200 VLAN100 A PORT 1 PORT2 PORT2 VCTRUNK VLAN200 VLAN100 B'
PORT 1
A'
NE 1 Cyber cafe user
NE 2 OptiX OSN equipment
Community user
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
31
4 Product Features
Figure 4-13 EVPL service based on MPLS

Add label PE Department B PORT2 VCTRUNK1 Department A Branch 1 PORT1 ` Department A P P Strip label PE PORT2 Department B
NE 1
PORT1 NE 2 Branch 2
Company A
OptiX OSN equipment
Figure 4-14 EVPL service based on QinQ

Add label C-Aware S-Aware Strip label S-Aware C-Aware
Departme nt B Departm ent A
PORT2 VCTRUNK1 PORT1 Branch 1 `
PORT2
Department B
NE 1
PORT1 NE 2 Branch 2
Department A
Company A
OptiX OSN equipment
EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service. Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
32
4 Product Features
Figure 4-15 EPLAN service
PORT1
VB Port 1 1 Department 3 of company A NE3
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VB PORT1 VB VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT1
Port 1 NE 1 Department 1 of company A Access point Company A NE 2
Port 1
Department 2 of company A OptiX OSN equipment
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements. As shown in Figure 4-16, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN equipment adopt VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
33
4 Product Features
Figure 4-16 EVPLAN service

PORT2 PORT1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
Department 3 of company B
VB
Department 3 of company A Port 2 S-Aware VCTRUNK1
Port 1
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware
NE3
VCTRUNK2 VB LSP LSP S-Aware VB C-Aware NE 2 Port 1 Port 1 Port 2 Department 2 of company B PORT2 PORT1
C-Aware PORT2 PORT1
NE 1 Port 2
Department 1 of company A
Department 1 of company B Company A
Department 2 of company A
Acess point
Company B
OptiX OSN equipment
SDH/PDH Service
This section describes the service support in TDM mode. The OptiX OSN 550 can process SDH services, PDH services, and Ethernet services. Table 4-3 lists the service categories that the OptiX OSN 550 supports in TDM mode. Table 4-3 Service categories that the OptiX OSN 550 supports in TDM mode Service Category SDH service Description
Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X8), VC-3-Xv (X24), VC-12-Xv (X63)
PDH service
E1/T1 and E3/T3 services
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
34
4 Product Features
4.2 Redundancy and Protection

The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiple redundancy and protection schemes.
4.2.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment supports several equipment level protection schemes.
Power Redundancy
1+1 backup for power supply: two channels of -48 V DC power supplies are connected by using two PIU boards for backup. As shown in Figure 4-17, the OptiX OSN 550 is configured with a pair of DC power supplies for backup. Normal operations are not affected if any external -48 V DC power supply fails. Figure 4-17 DC power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis
Mutual backup DC input
XXXX
PIU
SLOT 7 SLOT 5 SLOT 3 SLOT 1
XXXX
FAN
XXXX
XXXX
PIU
XXXX
As shown in Figure 4-18, the OptiX OSN 550 is configured with a pair of AC power supplies for backup. Normal operations are not affected if any external 100 V/240 V AC power supply fails. Figure 4-18 AC power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis
SLOT 92 SLOT91
XXXX
XXXX
SLOT 8 SLOT 6 APIU APIU
SLOT 93
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Mutual backup AC input
Fan Redundancy
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system. The failure of a single fan does not affect the operation of other fans.
System Control, Switching, and Timing Board Redundancy

The equipment provides 1+1 backup between the active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
35
4 Product Features
Figure 4-19 Board redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis (system control, switching, and timing board)
1+1 backup between active and standby
XXXX
PIU
XXXX
FAN
XXXX
XXXX
PIU
XXXX
4.2.2 Network Level Protection (Packet)

This section describes packet domain protection schemes, including tunnel APS, PW APS, MSTP, ERPS, LPT, and LAG.
PW APS
This section defines PW APS and describes its purpose.
Definition
PW APS is a function that protects PWs based on the APS protocol. When the working PW is faulty, PW APS switches services to a preconfigured protection PW. The PW APS function supported by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:

End-to-end protection for PWs. The working PW and protection PW are carried in different tunnels but have the same local and remote PEs. The protection PW in the PW APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic. The PW OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1711) or MPLS-TP OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1731) mechanism is used to detect faults in PWs, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose
PW APS improves the reliability of service transmission in PWs. As shown in Figure 4-20, when the PW OAM mechanism detects a fault in the working PW, services are switched to the protection PW for transmission.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
36
4 Product Features
Figure 4-20 Example of PW APS

PE2
Working PW PE1 PE4
Protection PW
PE3 Protect switching PE2
Working PW PE1 PE4
Protection PW
PE3 Service Packet transmission equipment
Tunnel APS
This section defines tunnel APS and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
Tunnel APS is a function that protects tunnels based on the APS protocol. When the working tunnel is faulty, tunnel APS switches services to a preconfigured protection tunnel. Tunnel APS supported by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:

Provides end-to-end protection for tunnels. The working tunnel and protection tunnel have the same ingress and egress nodes. The protection tunnel in the Tunnel APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
37
4 Product Features
The MPLS OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1711) or MPLS-TP OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1731) mechanism is used to detect faults in tunnels, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose
Tunnel APS is used to improve the reliability of service transmission over tunnels. Tunnel APS is used in two typical scenarios: co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels, and co-sourced tunnels with different sinks. Figure 4-21 and Figure 4-22 show the typical application scenarios. For co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels, a tunnel APS protection group is created between PE1 and PE2. Generally, services are transmitted on the working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty, APS occurs and the services are switched to the protection tunnel. Figure 4-21 Typical application of tunnel APS (for co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels)
PSN NodeB PE1 Tunnel APS Tunnel APS
Tunnel1
PE2
Tunnel2
RNC
NodeB
Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel
For co-sourced tunnels with different sinks, tunnel APS works with MC-LAG to implement cross-equipment protection. As shown in Figure 4-22, PE1 is an access-layer NE, and PE2 and PE3 are NEs at the backbone convergence layer. A tunnel APS protection group is created between PE1 and PE2 and between PE1 and PE3. Generally, services are transmitted on the working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty, APS occurs and the services are switched to the protection tunnel.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
38
4 Product Features
Figure 4-22 Typical application of tunnel APS (for co-sourced tunnels with different sinks)
PE2
PE1
Tunnel APS PSN
MC-LAG RNC
NodeB S
PE3 Working Tunnel Protection Tunnel Multi-chassis synchronous communication A S Active (carrying services) Standby (not carrying services)
ERPS
This section defines Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) and describes the purpose of this feature.
Definition
Based on the automatic protection switching (APS) protocol and protection switching mechanism, ERPS defines a protocol for Ethernet ring protection. ERPS is applicable to the Ethernet ring topology at the Ethernet Layer 2, and provides protection for LAN services on an Ethernet ring.
Purpose
When a ring network is configured with ERPS, in normal cases, the main node blocks its port on one side so that all the services are transmitted through the port on the other side. In this manner, service loops can be prevented. If a segment of links fails or an NE becomes faulty, the RPL owner unblocks the preceding port and the services that cannot be transmitted over the faulty point can be transmitted through this port. In this manner, ring protection is achieved. The Ethernet ring network as shown in Figure 4-23 is configured with ERPS. Generally, the RPL owner (NE D) blocks the port that is connected to NE A, and all the services are transmitted over the link NE A<->NE B<->NE C<->NE D. When the link between NE A<->NE B becomes faulty, NE D unblocks the port that is blocked so that the services can be transmitted over the link NE A<->NE D<->NE C<->NE B.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
39
4 Product Features
Figure 4-23 Implementation of the ERPS
NE A
NE B
NE D
NE C
Protection switching
Failure
NE A
NE B
NE D
NE C Link Ethernet service direction Blocked port
LAG
Link aggregation combines multiple links attached to the same equipment into a LAG so that the bandwidth of the LAG increases and links are made more reliable. The aggregated links are treated as a single logical link. A LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that transmits data at a higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. It does not have any impact on the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because links have a one-to-one mapping with ports on Ethernet networks.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
40
4 Product Features
As shown in Figure 4-24, the LAG provides the following functions:
Increased bandwidth LAGs provide users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. By combining multiple physical links into one logical link, users obtain a logical link with higher bandwidth without upgrading existing equipment, since the bandwidth of the logical link is equal to the sum of the bandwidth of all combined physical links. The aggregation module uses a load sharing algorithm to share traffic among the combined links.
Increased availability The links in a LAG dynamically back up each other. When a link fails, the other links in the LAG take over. Dynamic backup occurs only among links in the LAG; other links are not included.
Figure 4-24 Link aggregation group

Link 1 Link 2 Ethernet packets Link 3 Ethernet packets
LAG
LPT
This section defines LPT and provides the purpose of this feature.
Definition
Link-state pass through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service network and then instructs the equipment at both ends of the network to switch to a backup network. LPT ensures normal data transmission. As shown in Figure 4-25, LPT-enabled NE1 and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. When router A and router B detect a link fault between them, they immediately switch to the backup network.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
41
4 Product Features
Figure 4-25 Typical application of LPT
Backup network
Service network NE1 Router A Access link 1 Working link Protection link NE2 Access link 2 Router B
Purpose
LPT enabled access equipment detects link faults and immediately switches to a backup network.
MSTP
This topic defines MSTP and describes the purpose of this feature.
Definition
The spanning tree protocol (STP) is used in network loops. This protocol uses algorithms to break a loop network into a loop-free tree network to prevent packets from cycling endlessly in the loop network. See Figure 4-26. Figure 4-26 Diagram of the STP
Switch A Switch A
Switch B
Switch C
Switch B Root: Switch A
Switch C
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
42
4 Product Features
The rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is an optimized version of STP. RSTP stabilizes network topology more quickly than STP. RSTP is compatible with STP. STP packets and RSTP packets can be differentiated by the bridge that uses the RSTP for calculating the spanning tree. Compared with STP and RSTP, MSTP maximizes link bandwidth usage by setting up several independent spanning trees.
Purpose
STP/RSTP meets the following requirements:

Any activated bridge topology can be configured as a single spanning tree. Redundant data loops between two stations in a network topology should be removed. The spanning tree topology can be configured to protect against bridge faults or route interruptions. Temporary data loops can be prevented by automatically accepting the bridges and bridge ports of the bridges that are newly added into the LAN. A topology that has been activated can be predicted and repeated. In addition, the topology can be selected by managing algorithm parameters. Operations to the end stations are transparent. For example, the end stations do not know whether they are attached to a single LAN or a bridged LAN. A small part of the available link bandwidth is used to create and maintain a spanning tree. Bandwidth does not increase with the expanding network scale.
STP/RSTP have shortcomings that have become apparent as VLAN technology has developed. After the STP/RSTP is enabled, a loop network is broken into a single spanning tree and the blocked links do not carry any traffic. This wastes bandwidth. MSTP has fixed this defect in STP and RSTP in addition to stabilizing the network topology. MSTP provides a load sharing mechanism that enables the traffic of different VLANs to be transmitted over their respective trails.
MSTP divides a switching network into different regions, called MST regions. Multiple spanning trees that are independent of each other exist in each region. Each spanning tree is called a multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI). When MSTP is enabled, VLAN mapping tables specify the mapping relationships between VLANs and MSTIs. Each VLAN in an MST region corresponds to one MSTI and only this MSTI can transmit data for this VLAN. One MSTI, however, may be mapped to multiple VLANs.
Consider the network in Figure 4-27 as an example. VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 packets are transmitted over the network. When STP/RSTP is enabled, a single spanning tree that uses switch A as the root switch is generated and the links between switch B and switch C are blocked. Hence, the bandwidth of this link is not utilized.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
43
4 Product Features
Figure 4-27 Limitations of the STP/RSTP

Host A
Switch A
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
Host B
Switch B
Switch C
Host C
Blocked port Spanning tree Root switch
If MSTP is enabled and this network is an MST region, then VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 are each mapped to an MSTI. Figure 4-28 shows the network topology. On the ring:

MSTI 1 uses switch A as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 1. MSTI 2 uses switch C as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 2.
Different VLANs are forwarded over different trails and all VLAN packets are forwarded correctly. Load sharing is achieved.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
44
4 Product Features
Figure 4-28 MSTP improvement

Host A
Switch A
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
Host B
Switch B
Switch C
Host C
Switch A
Switch A
VLAN 1
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
VLAN 2 Switch B Switch C Switch B Switch C
MSTI 1 -> VLAN 1
MSTI 2 -> VLAN 2
Root switch
As shown in Figure 4-29, when equipment uses two different trails to access the OptiX OSN 550, you can configure the OptiX OSN 550 ports connected to the user network into a port group. This port group, together with a switch on the user network, can run the MSTP. If a service access link becomes faulty, MSTP generates a spanning tree topology to provide protection for a user network that is configured with multiple access points.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
45
4 Product Features
Figure 4-29 Typical MSTP scenario on the OptiX OSN 550
Root
Root
Port group CIST Blocked Port
ML-PPP
This section defines ML-PPP and describes the purpose of using this feature on transport networks.
Definition
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is a link layer protocol based on the Serial Line Interface Protocol (SLIP). PPP provides a standard method for encapsulating multiple types of protocol datagrams (including IP, IPX, and AppleTalk) on a point-to-point link. The Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP) is an extended PPP protocol. It is used to bind multiple low-rate PPP links into a virtual ML-PPP link. An ML-PPP link is also called a Multilink Protocol (MP) group. ML-PPP also supports packet splitting and recombination, therefore effectively reducing the transmission latency and increasing the maximum transfer unit (MTU) for a link. Using the ML-PPP function brings a network the following benefits:

Increased bandwidth Load sharing and link backup Lower latency
Purpose
ML-PPP links can bear MPLS tunnels so that the MPLS tunnels can traverse a TDM transport network. As shown in Figure 4-30, MPLS packets in the MPLS tunnel are encapsulated in E1s and transmitted over the ML-PPP link through the TDM network. At the TDM network edge, the MPLS packets are decapsulated from E1s.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
46
4 Product Features
Figure 4-30 Using an ML-PPP link to transmit services through a TDM network
Linear MSP
The packet-based linear MSP uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching and thus to protect services. The OptiX OSN equipment supports 1:1 packet-based linear MSP.
1:1 Packet-based linear MSP

1:1 packet-based linear MSP requires one working path and one protection path. Common services are transmitted in the working path. When the working path becomes faulty, the service in this path is switched to the protection path. Figure 4-31 shows the application of 1:1 packet-based linear MSP.
The extra traffic can not be transmitted in the protection path.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
47
4 Product Features
Figure 4-31 1:1 Packet-based linear MSP

NE A Common service Working path NE B Common service
Protection path
Protection switching NE A Common service NE B Common service
Working path
Protection path
Purpose
The packet-based linear MSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching once the working path fails, and thus to protect services.
4.2.3 Network Level Protection (TDM)

This section describes protection schemes including SNCP and linear MSP in the TDM domain.
LAG
Link aggregation combines multiple links attached to the same equipment into a LAG so that the bandwidth of the LAG increases and links are made more reliable. The aggregated links are treated as a single logical link. A LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that transmits data at a higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. It does not have any impact on the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because links have a one-to-one mapping with ports on Ethernet networks. As shown in Figure 4-32, the LAG provides the following functions:
Increased bandwidth LAGs provide users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. By combining multiple physical links into one logical link, users obtain a logical link with higher bandwidth without upgrading existing equipment, since the bandwidth of the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
48
4 Product Features
logical link is equal to the sum of the bandwidth of all combined physical links. The aggregation module uses a load sharing algorithm to share traffic among the combined links.
Increased availability The links in a LAG dynamically back up each other. When a link fails, the other links in the LAG take over. Dynamic backup occurs only among links in the LAG; other links are not included.
Figure 4-32 Link aggregation group

Link 1 Link 2 Ethernet packets Link 3 Ethernet packets
LAG
LCAS
This topic describes the LCAS in terms of background, function definition, and benefits to networks. With the diverse and complex development of the services transmitted in the SDH network, the demands for various access bandwidths increasingly grow. As a result, the previous monotone bandwidth (such as a VC-4) no longer meets the requirement. Hence, the concatenation technology emerges as the times require. Concatenation is classified into adjacent concatenation and virtual concatenation. The latter is more flexible than the former and enjoys higher bandwidth utilization than the former does. Both the adjacent concatenation and virtual concatenation have the following problems:

When any physical channel fails, all the concatenated channels fail and all services are interrupted. After services are set up, if you adjust the bandwidth of the services, the services are greatly affected.
The link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) technology emerges as a solution to the preceding problems. The LCAS improves and complements the virtual concatenation technology. The LCAS dynamically adjusts the number of virtual containers required for service mapping to meet the requirements of various service bandwidths. This elevates the bandwidth utilization and enhances the robustness of virtual concatenation.
The LCAS applies to only the virtually concatenated channels.
Adopting the LCAS function brings the network with the following benefits:

The LCAS dynamically adjusts (adds or deletes) the service bandwidth without affecting the availability of the existing services. When some of the physical channels in a virtual concatenation group fail, with LCAS, the failed channels are shielded and the other physical channels still transport the services normally. This prevents the services from being interrupted when some of the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
49
4 Product Features
physical channels fail. After the failed physical channels are restored, they can transport services.
LPT
This section defines LPT and provides the purpose of this feature.
Definition
Link-state pass through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service network and then instructs the equipment at both ends of the network to switch to a backup network. LPT ensures normal data transmission. As shown in Figure 4-33, LPT-enabled NE1 and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. When router A and router B detect a link fault between them, they immediately switch to the backup network. Figure 4-33 Typical application of LPT
Backup network
Service network NE1 Router A Access link 1 Working link Protection link NE2 Access link 2 Router B
Purpose
LPT enabled access equipment detects link faults and immediately switches to a backup network.
Ring MSP
Ring MSP uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching of services.
Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring MSP

On a two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP, one of the bidirectional STM-N lines is the working line, and the other is the protection line. As shown in Figure 4-34, the services on the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
50
4 Product Features
two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP are on diverse routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE ANE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE CNE DNE A. In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working line. When a fiber cut occurs and the working line becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working line of the faulty fiber to the protection line of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 4-34 shows the application of the two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE ANE DNE CNE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A continues to be NE CNE DNE A. Figure 4-34 Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP
Before protection switching

East West
NE A West NE B East NE C Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring NE D West East
West
East
After protection switching

East West
NE A West NE B East NE C Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring NE D West East
West
East Signal flow of services
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
51
4 Product Features
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP

On a two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP, the first half of VC-4s on each STM-N line is allocated to the working channel, and the other half of VC-4s is allocated to the protection channel. As shown in Figure 4-35, the services on the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP are on uniform routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE ANE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE CNE BNE A. In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working channel. The services transmitted on two fibers flow in inverse directions. When a fiber cut occurs and the working channel becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working channel of the faulty fiber to the protection channel of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 4-35 shows the application of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE ANE DNE CNE BNE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE CNE BNE CNE DNE A. Figure 4-35 Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP
Before protection switching

East West
NE A West NE B East NE C Two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring NE D West East
West
East
After protection switching

East West
NE A West NE B East NE C Two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring NE D West East
West
East Signal flow of services
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
52
4 Product Features
Linear MSP
The linear MSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to realize automatic protection switching. The OptiX OSN equipment supports 1+1 and 1:N linear MSP.
1+1 Linear MSP

The 1+1 linear MSP requires one working channel and one protection channel. At the source node, the service is dually fed to the working channel and protection channel. At the sink node, the service is received from the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty, the service is received from the protection channel. Figure 4-36 shows the application of the 1+1 linear MSP. Figure 4-36 1+1 linear MSP
NE A
Working channel
NE B
Protection channel
Protection switching NE A
Working channel
NE B
Protection channel
No extra traffic can be configured in the protection channel in a 1+1 linear MSP group.
1:N linear MSP

The 1:N linear MSP requires N working channels and one protection channel. Common services are transmitted on the working channels, and extra traffic is transmitted on the protection channel. When a working channel becomes faulty, the service on the channel is switched to the protection channel. Therefore, the extra traffic is interrupted. Figure 4-37 shows the application of the 1:N linear MSP.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
53
4 Product Features
Figure 4-37 1:N linear MSP

NE A Common service 1 ... Working channel N ... Common service N Protection channel Extra traffic Extra traffic Working channel 1 NE B Common service 1
Common service N
Protection switching NE A Common service 1 ... Working channel N Common service N Protection channel Extra traffic Extra traffic Common service N ... Working channel 1 NE B Common service 1
Purpose
The LMSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching once the working path fails, and therefore to protect services.
SNCP
SNCP requires one working subnet and one protection subnet so that services can be dually-fed and selectively-received. SNCP requires one working subnet and one protection subnet so that services can be dually-fed and selectively-received. If the working subnet fails to be connected or if its performance fails to meet requirements, the protection subnet takes over. Figure 4-38 shows the application of SNCP.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
54
4 Product Features
Figure 4-38 Application of SNCP

Working SNC Source end Sink end
NE A Protection SNC Protection switching Working SNC Source end
NE B
Sink end
NE A Protection SNC
NE B
4.3 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 550 supports IEEE 1588v2, synchronous Ethernet clock, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit/s clocks and can provide an end-to-end clock transport solution when deployed with MSTP or PTN products. When the OptiX OSN 550 uses IEEE 1588v2 to implement phase synchronization, it supports the following NE clock types: OC, TC, BC and TC+BC.
4.3.1 Requirements for Clock Synchronization

This section describes frequency and phase synchronization requirements of service networks. A service network, especially a radio access network (RAN), has stringent requirements for clock synchronization, and clock signals transmitted over a transport network must meet these requirements. Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks Table 4-4 lists clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks based on the wireless access mode.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
55
4 Product Features
Table 4-4 Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks Wireless Access Mode GSM WCDMA TD-SCDMA CDMA2000 WiMax FDD WiMax TDD LTE FDD LTE TDD Precision of Frequency Synchronization 0.05 ppm 0.05 ppm 0.05 ppm 0.05 ppm 0.05 ppm 0.011 ppm/3.5G, 7 carrier wave 0.05 ppm 0.05 ppm Precision of Phase Synchronization Phase synchronization is not required. Phase synchronization is not required. 1.5 us 3 us Phase synchronization is not required. 1 us Phase synchronization is not required. 1.5 us
Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems Billing and network management systems also require phase synchronization. Table 4-5 lists the phase synchronization requirements of some common systems. Table 4-5 Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems System Billing system Communication network management system Signaling system No. 7 Positioning system Phase Synchronization Precision 500 ms 500 ms 1 ms 1 us (equivalent to a positioning precision of 300 m)
4.3.2 Clock and Time Synchronization (Packet)

This section describes synchronization features including synchronous Ethernet clock and CES ACR in the packet domain.
Synchronous Ethernet Clock

The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology that extracts clock signals from serial bit streams on an Ethernet line, and transmits the extracted clock signals with services to implement the transfer of the clock signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
56
4 Product Features
As SDH networks are evolving into data networks, carrier-level large-scale networks require synchronous Ethernet to transmit clock signals. The networkwide synchronous transmission idea of the SDH system needs to be introduced to the Ethernet design. Clock signals are transmitted from the core to the edge by using the Ethernet physical layer, which ensures synchronization for all types of real-time services. Figure 4-39 shows the typical network to which synchronous Ethernet is applied networkwide. BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit clock signals to NE1 and NE2 through external clock ports. NE1 and NE2 transmit the clock signals to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals from the convergence layer to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner, networkwide clock synchronization is achieved. Figure 4-39 Typical network to which synchronous Ethernet is applied networkwide
BITS1 BITS2
Clock information
Clock information
NE1 NE3
GE ring
NE2 NE4 Convergence layer
2.5 Gbit/s chain
622 Mbit/s chain
155 Mbit/s chain
NE5
NE6
NE7 Access layer
Node B
Node B
Node B
OptiX OSN convergence equipment OptiX OSN access equipment Clock information
Figure 4-40 shows a typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR. BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit synchronous Ethernet clock signals to Router1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
57
4 Product Features
and Router2 through external clock ports. Because Router1 and Router2 need to transmit the synchronous Ethernet clock signals to convergence-layer NEs (NE1 and NE2) through a non-transport network, they convert the synchronous Ethernet clock signals into IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals. After the IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals traverse the non-transport network and reach NE1 and NE2, the two NEs restore the signals into synchronous Ethernet clock signals and transmit them to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner, networkwide clock synchronization is achieved.
Currently, the equipment supports only the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals into synchronous Ethernet signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
58
4 Product Features
Figure 4-40 Typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR
BITS1 BITS2
Clock information
Clock information
Router1
Router2
IEEE 1588 ACR
NE1 NE3
Synchronous ethernet clock
NE2 NE4 Converge nce layer
NE5
NE6
NE7
Access layer
Node B
Node B
Node B
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
59
4 Product Features
IEEE 1588v2
This section provides the definition of IEEE 1588v2 and describes its purpose.
Definition
The IEEE 1588v2 defines a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems. It defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) to synchronize independent clocks running on separate nodes of a distributed measurement and control system to a high degree of accuracy and precision. The IEEE 1588v2 standard supports time synchronization accuracy in the submicrosecond range. Synchronization involves clock synchronization (also called frequency synchronization) or time synchronization. The IEEE 1588v2 standard mainly applicable to time synchronization, and it can also be used for clock synchronization.
Clock synchronization To achieve synchronization of clocks for two devices, the pulses of the clocks must be at the same frequency and keep a constant phase difference.
Time synchronization To achieve time synchronization, the pulses of the clocks must be at the same frequency and have a very small phase difference as required, and the times indicated by the clocks must be measured in the same timescale. The commonly used timescales include universal coordinated time (UTC) and international atomic time (TAI, from the French name Temps Atomique International).
Purpose
In the applications on transmission networks, the IEEE 1588v2 standard provides an approach to 1588v2 time synchronization on a network basis, with a synchronization accuracy in the microsecond range; as well, the IEEE 1588v2 standard helps in transparent transmission of 1588v2 time signals. As such, the IEEE 1588v2 standard, as an alternative to the global positioning system (GPS) or other complex timing systems, can be used to provide 1588v2 time for NodeBs or eNodeBs. Figure 4-41 illustrates an application example wherein the IEEE 1588v2 standard helps to synchronize the time of NodeBs distributed in a CDMA2000 or TD-SCDMA communication system.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
60
4 Product Features
Figure 4-41 Time synchronization of NodeBs implemented by the IEEE 1588v2 standard
RNC BITS
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB Time synchronization
PTP node
IEEE 1588 ACR

This section defines IEEE 1588 ACR and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) is a technology used to achieve frequency synchronization between the clock equipment that supports the IEEE 1588v2 standard. To be specific, the master equipment encapsulates the local system clock into a Sync packet as a timestamp and transmits the Sync packet to a packet switched network (PSN), which forwards the Sync packet to the slave equipment. On receiving the Sync packet, the slave equipment extracts the timestamp from the Sync packet and recovers the clock frequency by using the ACR algorithm. In this way, the clock frequency of the PTP equipment at the two ends of a PSN is synchronized. IEEE 1588 ACR achieves only frequency synchronization but not time synchronization.
Purpose
With the IEEE 1588 ACR technology applied on a transport network, the clock frequency is carried in an IEEE 1588v2 packet, which traverses an asynchronous PSN. As a result, the clock frequency of the equipment at the two ends of the PSN is synchronized.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
61
4 Product Features
In the network as shown in Figure 4-42, the PTP node on the RNC side encapsulates the clock frequency of the building integrated timing supply (BITS) equipment into an IEEE 1588v2 packet, which traverses the asynchronous PSN. On receiving the IEEE 1588v2 packet, the PTP nodes on the NodeB side recover the clock frequency of the BITS equipment from the IEEE 1588v2 packet by using the ACR algorithm, and send the clock frequency to the NodeBs. In this way, the clock frequencies of the NodeBs are synchronized with the clock frequency of the RNC. Figure 4-42 IEEE 1588 ACR frequency synchronization
BITS NodeB
PSN NodeB RNC
NodeB
PTP node Frequency synchronization
Router/Switch Transparent transmission of frequency
Equipment on a transport network supports the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals from a non-transport network into synchronous Ethernet clock signals to achieve networkwide frequency synchronization. As shown in Figure 4-43, BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit synchronous Ethernet clock signals to Router1 and Router 2 through external clock ports. Because Router1 and Router2 need to transmit the synchronous Ethernet clock signals to convergence-layer NEs (NE1 and NE2) through a non-transport network, they convert the synchronous Ethernet clock signals into IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals. After the IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals traverse the non-transport network and reach NE1 and NE2, the two NEs restore the signals into synchronous Ethernet clock signals and transmit them to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner, networkwide frequency synchronization is achieved.
Currently, the equipment supports only the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals into synchronous Ethernet signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
62
4 Product Features
Figure 4-43 Typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR
BITS1 BITS2
Clock information
Clock information
Router1
Router2
IEEE 1588 ACR
NE1 NE3
NE2 NE4 Converge nce layer
NE5
NE6
NE7
Access layer
Node B
Node B
Node B
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
63
4 Product Features
CES ACR
This section defines CES ACR and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
CES ACR uses the adaptive clock recovery (ACR) technology to recover clock synchronization information carried by CES packets. CES ACR is available in two types: standard and enhanced. In a standard CES ACR solution, the source end (Master) uses the local clock information as the timestamp in a Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packet header and encapsulates the local clock information in a CES packet. The sink end (Slave) recovers the clock using the timestamp in the packet. This method prevents signal impairment during the transmission. The OptiX OSN 550 adopts the enhanced timestamp clock solution. That is, clocks can be recovered based on SN in CES packets rather than timestamps in RTP packet headers. See Figure 4-44. Figure 4-44 CES ACR clock solution
Slave
SN
Master
SN
E1
Processing
CES
CES
E1
Processing
Primary reference clock
PSN
E1 CES E1
BTS
PE1
PE2
BSC
Packet transmission equipment
SN: Sequnce Number
Purpose
In the packet domain, CES ACR is mainly used to transparently transmit E1 clocks in the PSN. For details, see CES ACR Clock Transparent Transmission Solution.
4.3.3 Clock Synchronization (TDM)

Clock synchronization on the entire network helps to transmit services normally.
Definition
Clock: The electronic circuit in a computer that generates a steady stream of timing pulses.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
64
4 Product Features
Purpose
Clock synchronization ensures that all the digital devices on a communications network work at the same nominal frequency, and therefore minimizes the impacts of slips, burst bit errors, phase jumps, jitters, and wanders on digital communications systems. Clock synchronization also minimizes pointer justifications on SDH devices. Therefore, clock synchronization is the precondition and basis for the normal operation of a network.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
65
5 Hardware and Structure
5
About This Chapter
5.1 Chassis 5.2 Outdoor Cabinet 5.3 Board Category
Hardware and Structure
This section describes the chassis, boards, and external components of the equipment.
This section describes the structure, slot layout, and access capacity of the chassis.
The equipment operating in a high-temperature and dust-concentrated outdoor environment needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. Different boards provide the equipment with different functions.
5.1 Chassis
This section describes the structure, slot layout, and access capacity of the chassis.
5.1.1 Chassis Structure

This section describes the chassis structure and equipment labels.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
66
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
H D W
Board installation area
SLOT SLOT 10 91 SLOT (PIU) SLOT (PIU) 11 93 SLOT (FAN) SLOT (FAN) 9 92 (PIU) (PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH) SLOT 7 SLOT 5 (EXT) SLOT 5 (EXT) SLOT 3 (EXT) SLOT 3 (EXT) SLOT 1 (EXT ) SLOT 1 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH) SLOT 8 SLOT 6 6 (EXT) SLOT (EXT) SLOT 4 4 (EXT) SLOT (EXT) SLOT 2 2 (EXT ) SLOT (EXT)
2 3
1 Power supply boards 2 Fan board
3 4
Extended boards System control, switching, and timing boards
An OptiX OSN 550 NE can automatically save its NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask to its backplane. After a new system control, switching, and timing board replaces an original one, the NE automatically uses the saved information. Therefore, you do not need to set the NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask for the substitute board.
Ventilation Design
The chassis is densely covered with small air holes. Through these holes, air is let in from the left and out from the right by fans.
Ensure the smooth flow of air inside and around the equipment. Do not block the air intake vents and air exhaust vents of subracks when cabling. Keep the top of subracks clean.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
67
Figure 5-1 Ventilation design of the OptiX OSN 550

AIR OUT
AIR IN
Label Description
Table 5-1 provides the description of the labels on the chassis and boards. Actual labels may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 5-1 Description of labels Label Label Name ESD protection label Description Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the grounding position of the chassis. Warns you not to touch fan leaves when the fan is rotating. Instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-related tasks. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum optical power of the optical port is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Fan warning label
Power caution label
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
Laser safety class label
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
68
Label
/ QUALIFICATION CARD
Label Name Qualification card label
Description Indicates that the equipment has been quality checked.
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
RoHS label
50
Indicates that the equipment contains certain hazardous substances specified in the RoHS directive. The equipment needs to be recycled after the environment-friendly use period of 50 years expires. Indicates the product name and certification.
DC power
Product nameplate label
AC power
5.1.2 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (Packet)

This section provides switching capacities and slot access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in packet mode.
Switching Capacities (Packet Mode)

Table 5-2 lists packet switching capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are installed. Table 5-2 Switching capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 Board PCXLX PCXX PCXLG Maximum Switching Capacity (Gbit/s) 60 60 40
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
69
Board PCXGA PCXGB
Maximum Switching Capacity (Gbit/s) 20 40
Access Capacities of Slots (Packet Mode)

Figure 5-2 provides access capacities of slots when PCXLX/PCXX boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550. Figure 5-2 Access capacities of slots when PCXLX/PCXX boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550
SLO SLOT T 1 91 0 SLOT SLO (PIU T (PIU) ) 1 93 1 SLO SLOT (FAN) T 9 92 (PIU (PIU) ) SLOT 1 SLOT 1 ) (EXT 10Gbit/s SLOT 2 SLOT 2 ) 10Gbit/s (EXT SLOT 7 SLOT 7 10Gbit/s (CST/CSH) SLOT 5 4Gbit/s (EXT) SLOT 3 (EXT) 4Gbit/s SLOT SLOT 8 10Gbit/s 8 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
SLOT 6 4Gbit/s (EXT) SLOT 4 4Gbit/s (EXT)
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
Figure 5-3 provides access capacities of slots when PCXGB/PCXLG boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550. Figure 5-3 Access capacities of slots when PCXLG/PCXGB boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550
SLO SLOT T 1 91 0 SLOT SLO (PIU T (PIU) ) 1 93 1 SLO SLOT (FAN) T 9 92 (PIU (PIU) ) SLOT 1 SLOT 1 ) (EXT 10Gbit/s SLOT 2 SLOT 2 ) 10Gbit/s (EXT SLOT 7 SLOT 7 1Gbit/s (CST/CSH) SLOT 5 4Gbit/s (EXT) SLOT 3 (EXT) 4Gbit/s 1Gbit/s SLOT SLOT 8 8 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
Figure 5-4 provides access capacities of slots when PCXGA boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
70
Figure 5-4 Access capacities of slots when PCXGA boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550
SLO SLOT T 1 91 0 SLOT SLO (PIU T (PIU) ) 1 93 1 SLO SLOT (FAN) T 9 92 (PIU (PIU) ) SLOT 1 SLOT 1 ) (EXT 2.5Gbit/s SLOT 2 SLOT 2 ) 2.5Gbit/s (EXT SLOT 7 SLOT 7 1Gbit/s (CST/CSH) SLOT 5 4Gbit/s (EXT) SLOT 3 (EXT) 4Gbit/s SLOT SLOT 8 1Gbit/s 8 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
5.1.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (TDM)

This section provides cross-connect capacities and slot access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM mode.
Cross-Connect Capacities (TDM Mode)

Table 5-3 lists cross-connect capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are installed. Table 5-3 Cross-connect capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 Board Higher Order Cross-Connect Capacity (Gbit/s) 20 Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity (Gbit/s) 5
PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PC XGA/PCXGB/CXL
Access Capacities of Slots (TDM Mode)

Access capacities of all slots are shown in Figure 5-5. The access capacity of a slot remains the same regardless of whether the CXL, PCXLX, PCXX, PCXLG, PCXGA, or PCXGB board is installed. Figure 5-5 Access capacities of slots on the OptiX OSN 550
SLO SLOT T 1 91 0 SLOT SLO (PIU T (PIU) ) 1 93 1 SLO SLOT (FAN) T 9 92 (PIU (PIU) ) SLOT 1 SLOT 1 ) (EXT 2.5Gbit/s SLOT 2 SLOT 2 ) 2.5Gbit/s (EXT SLOT 7 SLOT 7 2.5Gbit/s (CST/CSH) SLOT 5 1.25Gbit/s (EXT) SLOT 3 1.25Gbit/s (EXT) 2.5Gbit/s SLOT SLOT 8 8 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 5
SLOT 6
SLOT 6 1.25Gbit/s (EXT) SLOT 4 1.25Gbit/s (EXT)
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
71
5.2 Outdoor Cabinet

The equipment operating in a high-temperature and dust-concentrated outdoor environment needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet. The OptiX OSN 550 can be installed in APM30H outdoor cabinet, For the details of APM30H, see Outdoor Cabinet in Hardware Description.
5.3 Board Category

This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. Different boards provide the equipment with different functions. Table 5-4 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. Table 5-4 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Board Classificat ion System control, switching, and timing board (Hybrid) Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXL X Board Name The cross-connec t, timing, system control, and line board supports:
Port Type
Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
A packet switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s A higher order cross-con nect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-con nect capacity of 5 Gbit/s One 10GE and one STM-N
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
72
Board Classificat ion
Board Acron ym
Board Name ports
Port Type
Valid Slot
System communi cation and control
TNM1 PCXX
The cross-connec t, timing, system control, and line board supports:
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and 8
A packet switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s A higher order cross-con nect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-con nect capacity of 5 Gbit/s One 10GE port System communi cation and control
TNM1 PCXL G
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be
Slots 7 and 8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
73
Board Acron ym
Board Name
Port Type
Valid Slot
A packet switching capacity of 40 Gbit/s A higher order cross-con nect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-con nect capacity of 5 Gbit/s One GE and one STM-N ports System communi cation and control
S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules.
One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
TNM1 PCXG A
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Slots 7 and 8
A packet switching capacity of 20 Gbit/s A higher order cross-con nect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
74
Board Acron ym
Board Name lower order cross-con nect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
Port Type
Valid Slot
One GE port System communi cation and control
TNM1 PCXG B
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Slots 7 and 8
A packet switching capacity of 40 Gbit/s A higher order cross-con nect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-con nect capacity of 5 Gbit/s One GE port System communi cation and control
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
75
Board Classificat ion System control, switching, and timing board (TDM)
Board Acron ym TNM1 CXL1
Board Name The cross-connec t, timing, system control, and line board supports:
Port Type
Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One STM-1 SFP optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One STM-4 SFP optical port of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) One STM-16 SFP optical port of the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2 type
TNM1 CXL4
TNM1 CXL16
A higher order cross-con nect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-con nect capacity of 5 Gbit/s System communi cation and control
Slots 7 and 8
Slots 7 and 8
Packet processing board
TNM1 MD1
32xsmart E1 service processing board 6xRJ45 FE/GE processing board
75/120-ohm E1 port
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 EM6T
Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-T(X) Two GE electrical ports (they can serve as FE electrical ports): 1000BASE-T Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-T(X) Two GE/FE SFP optical/electrical ports: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/ 1000Base-T/100BASE-BX/100 BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/100B ASE-VX/100BASE-ZX Four GE electrical ports:
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 EM6F
4xRJ45 and 2xSFP FE/GE processing board
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1
4xGE (SFP/RJ45)
Slots 3 to
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
76
Board Acron ym EG4C
Board Name processing board
Port Type
Valid Slot 6
1000BASE-T
Four GE/FE SFP optical ports: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/ 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/10 0BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100 BASE-ZX Eight FE SFP optical ports: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/10 0BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100 BASE-ZX Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 EF8F
8xFE processing board 1x10GE processing board
TNM1 EX1
One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 1 and 2
TNM1 CQ1
4-port channelized STM-1 service processing board 2xSTM-1 interface board 4xSTM-1 interface board 2xSTM-4 interface board 42xE1/T1 tributary board 3xE3/T3 tributary board 8xFE
Four STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports of the S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical type or of SFP electrical modules
Slots 1 to 6
SDH board
TNH2S L1D
Two STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. Four STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. Two STM-4 SFP optical ports of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type Forty-two 75/120-ohm E1 ports or forty-two 100-ohm T1 ports Three 75-ohm E3/T3 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S L1Q
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S L4D PDH board TNH2S P3D TNH2P L3T EoS board TNH2E
Slots 1 to 6 Slots 1 to 6 Slots 1 to 6 Slots 1 to
Eight FE electrical ports:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
77
Board Acron ym FS8
Board Name switching and processing board 1xGE transparent transmission board 2-port optical add/drop multiplexing board
Port Type
Valid Slot 6
10/100BASE-T(X)
TNH2E GT1
One GE SFP optical/electrical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/100 0BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/1000B ase-T

Slots 1 to 6
WDM board
TNM1 DMD2
wIN/wOUT wA1/wA2 wD1/wD2 eIN/eOUT eA1/eA2 eD1/eD2 One orderwire phone port One asynchronous data port One synchronous data port 6-input/2-output alarm port One 2-channel external clock port Two 2-channel external time ports One 110 V/220 V AC power input port Two -48 V DC power output ports
slot 1 to 6
Auxiliary interface board
TNM1 AUX
Auxiliary interface board
Slots 1 to 6
Power supply board
UPM
Uninterrupti ble power module
Slot 97
TND1P IU TNF1A PIU
Power supply board Power supply board
One -48 V/-60 V DC power input port Two 110 V/220 V AC power input ports
Slots 91 and 92
Slots 4 and 6 (recom mende d) Slots 2 and 4
Fan board
TNM1 FAN
Fan board
N/A
Slot 93
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
78
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Networking and Application Scenarios
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 supports various service networking topologies in the time division multiplexing (TDM) and packet domains, applicable to a wide range of scenarios. 6.1 Basic Network Topologies OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. 6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 can transport packet services and time division multiplexing (TDM) services at the same time. 6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking. 6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking This section describes the typical application of time division multiplexing (TDM) networking.
6.1 Basic Network Topologies

OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. The OptiX OSN 550 supports separate and combined configurations of the following types: terminal multiplexer (TM), add/drop multiplexer (ADM), and multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM). OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. In addition, OptiX OSN 550s can be interconnected with other OptiX OSN equipment, OptiX DWDM equipment, and OptiX Metro equipment to provide a complete transport network solution. See Table 6-1.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
79
Table 6-1 Network topologies supported by OptiX OSN 550s and corresponding legends Network Topology Chain Legend
Ring
Tangent rings
Intersecting rings
Ring with chain
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking

In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 can transport packet services and time division multiplexing (TDM) services at the same time. Figure 6-1 shows a Hybrid ring network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:

2G base station services 3G ATM base station services
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
80
3G IP base station services
Figure 6-1 Hybrid networking
E1/T1 E1/STM-1 ATM/IMA E1
FE ATM/IMA E1/GE
TDM ring Packet ring Signal flow OptiX OSN 550 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II NodeB BTS RNC BSC
Networking Solution
When numerous E1 services and Ethernet services coexist, the Hybrid networking solution mixing the SDH technology and PTN technology is used to meet multi-service transmission demands and improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.

E1 services are transmitted in pure TDM mode over the SDH network, which reduces the network buildout and maintenance cost. FE services and GE services are transmitted in pure packet mode over the PTN network, which reduces the transmission cost per bit. WDM colored optical ports and built-in optical add/drop multiplexers are used when optical fiber resources are over-consumed or inadequate.
Service Types
2G base station services and 3G ATM base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 (or PWE3) mode respectively. These services are then mapped to VC-12s and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the BSC. 3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode, and encapsulated into PWE3 packets. The PWE3 packets are then aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II that is connected to the RNC in end-to-end mode.
Table 6-2 lists the service types and their transmission modes. Table 6-2 Service types and their transmission modes for a Hybrid network UNI-side Device 2G base station 3G ATM base Service Port TDM E1/T1 ATM/IMA E1 Encapsulation Mode VC VC Transmission Technology SDH SDH Service Topology VC P2P connection VC P2P
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
81
UNI-side Device station 3G IP base station
Service Port
Encapsulation Mode
Transmission Technology
Service Topology connection
FE
PWE3
MPLS/MPLS-T P
VPWS, VPLS
A 3G base station and an RNC exchange services, base station management information, and signaling. Base station management information and signaling due to their importance are preferentially processed in the transmission network. Therefore, base station management information and signaling are assigned a VLAN called the management VLAN, and services are assigned a VLAN called the service VLAN. The management VLAN has a higher priority than the service VLAN. To prevent VLAN conflicts, VLANs must be planned by considering all base stations. Generally, the base stations managed by the same RNC are grouped into multiple switch areas. All base stations in the same switch area share one management VLAN and one service VLAN. Base stations in different switch areas have different management VLANs and service VLANs. See Figure 6-2. On the same OptiX OSN 550, the management VLAN and service VLAN are mapped to different PWs, and the PWs are carried by the same tunnel to save label resources.
Figure 6-2 VLAN plan
RNC
Transmission network
NodeB Switch area 1: Management VLAN=68, Pri=6 Service VLAN=78, Pri=4
Protection
The SDH network is protected by the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) or MSP mechanism.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
The PTN network is protected by the PW 1:1 APS or tunnel 1:1 APS mechanism. To achieve dual-homing at the convergence layer, a 1:1 APS protection group with the same source but different sinks needs to be configured, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 PW/Tunnel 1:1 APS
nel chan g in k Wor
Prote ction
chan
nel
PW
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 PW APS
Tunnel
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 tunnel APS
OptiX OSN 550/500
OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions for PTN networks, including ETH-OAM, MPLS OAM, and MPLS-TP OAM. Figure 6-4 shows the application of hierarchical OAM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
83
Figure 6-4 Application of hierarchical OAM on a Hybrid network

P P
PE1 CE1
PE2 CE3
CE4
OptiX OSN 550/500
For higher network bandwidth utilization, generally only CC/CV OAM is enabled for a tunnel. In addition, to limit tunnel APS protection switching within 50 ms, the detection packet transmission interval is set to 3.3 ms.
QoS
As the service access node, an OptiX OSN 550 is generally connected to multiple base stations. Each base station has different priorities of management data and service data. The quality of service (QoS) function is used for managing traffic of different services from different base stations. Table 6-3 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550. Table 6-3 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a Hybrid network Network Position Ingress node Point of Application Ingress direction of the UNI port PW ingress Egress direction of the NNI port QoS Function VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) CAR for PWs, the VLAN Pri field being mapped to the LSP EXP field Weighted random early detection (WRED) congestion management, SP+WRR scheduling (SP is short for strict priority and weighted round robin for WRR.) Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields WRED congestion management, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling (WFQ is short for
84
Transit node
Ingress direction of the NNI port Egress direction of the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Network Position
Point of Application NNI port
QoS Function weighted fair queuing.) Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields WRED, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling, the LSP EXP field being mapped to the VLAN Pri field VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and CAR
Egress node
Ingress direction of the NNI port Egress direction of the UNI port Ingress direction of the UNI port
Synchronization
The SDH clock or synchronous Ethernet clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
As shown in Figure 6-5, clock synchronization information from the two building integrated timing supplies (BITSs) is injected into the two OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II nodes on the aggregation ring. The master BITS provides a higher-priority clock source and the slave BITS provides a lower-priority clock source. The base stations derive clock synchronization information from the OptiX OSN 550 by means of the retiming E1 clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization on a Hybrid network

ATM/IMA E1/FE/2M external clock
Master BITS
TDM E1
Physical synchronization route Physical synchronization protection route
Slave BITS
BITS
OptiX OSN 550
Node B
BTS
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking

This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
85
Figure 6-6 shows a pure packet network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:

2G base station services 3G ATM base station services 3G IP base station services LTE base station services
Figure 6-6 Pure packet networking
E1/T1 E1/STM-1 ATM/IMA E1
FE ATM/IMA E1/GE
10GE S-GW/MME Packet ring Signal flow OptiX OSN 550 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II NodeB BTS RNC BSC
Networking Solution
When a few E1 services and numerous Ethernet services coexist, the pure packet networking solution using the cost-effective PTN technology is used to meet multi-service transmission demands and improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.

E1 services are transmitted in TDM/ATM PWE3 mode over the PTN network since the TDM network is unavailable in the pure packet networking solution. FE services and GE services are transmitted in pure packet mode over the PTN network, which reduces the transmission cost per bit.
Service Types
2G base station services and 3G ATM base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 mode respectively. These services are then encapsulated into PWE3 packets. Finally, the PWE3 packets are aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode. 3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode, and encapsulated into PWE3 packets. The PWE3 packets are then aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode. LTE base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in GE mode, and encapsulated into PWE3 packets. The PWE3 packets are then aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode.
Table 6-4 lists the service types and their transmission modes.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
86
Table 6-4 Service types and their transmission modes for a pure PTN network UNI-side Device 2G base station 3G ATM base station 3G IP base station LTE base station Service Port TDM E1/T1 ATM/IMA E1 FE GE Encapsulation Mode PWE3 PWE3 PWE3 PWE3 Transmission Technology MPLS/MPLS-T P MPLS/MPLS-T P MPLS/MPLS-T P MPLS/MPLS-T P Service Topology End-to-end P2P connection End-to-end P2P connection VPWS, VPLS VPWS, VPLS
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
87
A 3G/LTE base station and an RNC/S-GW/MME exchange services, base station management information, and signaling. Base station management information and signaling due to their importance are preferentially processed in the transmission network. Therefore, base station management information and signaling are assigned a VLAN called the management VLAN, and services are assigned a VLAN called the service VLAN. The management VLAN has a higher priority than the service VLAN. To prevent VLAN conflicts, VLANs must be planned by considering all base stations. Generally, the base stations managed by the same RNC/S-GW/MME are grouped into multiple switch areas. All base stations in the same switch area share one management VLAN and one service VLAN. Base stations in different switch areas have different management VLANs and service VLANs. See Figure 6-7. On the same OptiX OSN 550, the management VLAN and service VLAN are mapped to different PWs, and the PWs are carried by the same tunnel to save label resources.
Figure 6-7 VLAN plan
RNC/S-GW/MME
Transmission network
NodeB/eNodeB Switch area 1: Management VLAN=68, Pri=6 Service VLAN=78, Pri=4
Protection
The PTN network is protected by the PW 1:1 APS or tunnel 1:1 APS mechanism. To achieve dual-homing at the convergence layer, a 1:1 APS protection group with the same source but different sinks needs to be configured, as shown in Figure 6-8.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
88
Figure 6-8 PW/Tunnel 1:1 APS
nel chan g in k Wor
Prote ction
chan
nel
PW
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 PW APS
Tunnel
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 tunnel APS
OptiX OSN 550/500
OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions for PTN networks, including ETH-OAM, MPLS OAM, and MPLS-TP OAM. Figure 6-9 shows the application of hierarchical OAM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
89
Figure 6-9 Application of hierarchical OAM on a Hybrid network

P P
PE1 CE1
PE2 CE3
CE4
OptiX OSN 550/500
For higher network bandwidth utilization, generally only CC/CV OAM is enabled for a tunnel. In addition, to limit tunnel APS protection switching within 50 ms, the detection packet transmission interval is set to 3.3 ms.
QoS
As the service access node, an OptiX OSN 550 is generally connected to multiple base stations. Each base station has different priorities of management data and service data. The QoS function is used for managing traffic of different services from different base stations. Table 6-5 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550. Table 6-5 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a pure PTN network Network Position Ingress node Point of Application Ingress direction of the UNI port PW ingress Egress direction of the NNI port QoS Function VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) CAR for PWs, the VLAN Pri field being mapped to the LSP EXP field Weighted random early detection (WRED) congestion management, SP+WRR scheduling (SP is short for strict priority and weighted round robin for WRR.) Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields WRED congestion management, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling (WFQ is short for
90
Transit node
Ingress direction of the NNI port Egress direction of the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Network Position
Point of Application NNI port
QoS Function weighted fair queuing.) Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields WRED, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling, the LSP EXP field being mapped to the VLAN Pri field VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and CAR
Egress node
Ingress direction of the NNI port Egress direction of the UNI port Ingress direction of the UNI port
Synchronization
The synchronous Ethernet clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
As shown in Figure 6-10, clock synchronization information from the two building integrated timing supplies (BITSs) is injected into the two OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II nodes on the aggregation ring. The master BITS provides a higher-priority clock source and the slave BITS provides a lower-priority clock source. The base stations derive clock synchronization information from the OptiX OSN 550 by means of the retiming E1 clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-10 Clock synchronization on a pure PTN network

ATM/IMA E1/FE/2M external clock
Master BITS
TDM E1
Slave BITS
BITS
OptiX OSN 550
Node B
BTS
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking

This section describes the typical application of time division multiplexing (TDM) networking.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
91
Figure 6-11 shows a TDM network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:

2G base station services 3G ATM base station services 3G IP base station services
Figure 6-11 Pure TDM networking
E1/T1 E1/STM-1
FE GE
TDM ring Signal flow OptiX OSN 550 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II NodeB BTS RNC BSC
Networking Solution
When numerous E1 services and a few Ethernet services coexist, the pure TDM networking solution using the sophisticated and cost-effective SDH technology is used to improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.

E1 services are transmitted in pure TDM mode over the SDH network, which reduces the network buildout and maintenance cost. FE services are transmitted in Ethernet over SDH (EoS) mode over the SDH network since the PTN network is unavailable in the pure TDM networking solution.
Service Types
2G base station services and 3G ATM base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 mode respectively. These services are then mapped to VC-12s and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the BSC and RNC. 3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode. These services are then encapsulated into VC-12s in EoS mode and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the RNC.
Table 6-6 lists the service types and their transmission modes. Table 6-6 Service types and their transmission modes for a pure TDM network UNI-side Device 2G base station Service Port TDM E1/T1 Encapsulation Mode VC Transmission Technology SDH Service Topology VC P2P
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
92
UNI-side Device
Service Port
Encapsulation Mode
Transmission Technology
Service Topology connection
3G ATM base station 3G IP base station
ATM/IMA E1 FE
VC Ethernet over SDH
SDH SDH
VC P2P connection EVPL, EVPLAN
Protection
The SDH network is protected by the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) or MSP mechanism.
OAM
The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet port OAM that complies with IEEE 802.3ah and Ethernet service OAM that complies with IEEE 802.1ag for Ethernet service fault analysis and locating. Figure 6-12 shows the application of ETH-OAM. Figure 6-12 Application of ETH-OAM on a pure TDM network
P P
PE1 CE1
PE2 CE3
CE2 P Ethernet Port OAM ETH Layer MEP Ethernet Service OAM P
CE4
OptiX OSN 550/500
QoS
As the service access node, the OptiX OSN 550 may receive burst Ethernet traffic. The committed access rate (CAR) mechanism must be applied for incoming traffic. Incoming traffic must be scheduled before being transmitted to virtual concatenation (VC) channels, to ensure that higher-priority services are forwarded first. The QoS function is used for managing traffic of different services from different base stations. Table 6-7 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
93
Table 6-7 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a pure TDM network Network Position Access node Aggregation node Point of Application Ingress direction of the UNI port Ingress direction of the UNI port QoS Function Traffic classification, committed access rate (CAR), priority-based scheduling Traffic classification, CAR, priority-based scheduling
Synchronization
The SDH clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
As shown in Figure 6-13, clock synchronization information from the two building integrated timing supplies (BITSs) is injected into the two OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II nodes on the aggregation ring. The master BITS provides a higher-priority clock source and the slave BITS provides a lower-priority clock source. The base stations derive clock synchronization information from the OptiX OSN 550 by means of the retiming E1 clock or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-13 Clock synchronization on a pure TDM network

ATM/IMA E1/2M external clock
Master BITS
TDM E1
Slave BITS
BITS
OptiX OSN 550
Node B
BTS
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
94
7 Network Management System
7
About This Chapter
Network Management System
The OptiX OSN 550 is uniformly managed by the transmission network management system (NMS) and local craft terminal (LCT) through the ETH port. The OptiX OSN 550 supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The NMS maintains the OSN, SDH, Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on an entire network. The NMS can implement end-to-end configurations for TDM and packet services. The OptiX OSN 550 complies with ITU-T Recommendations. The equipment adopts a management information model and an object-oriented management technology. With the NMS, the equipment can exchange information with the NE software through the communication module to manage alarms and performance events in a centralized manner. In addition, end-to-end configuration on the management plane can be achieved. The OptiX OSN 550 supports SNMPv2/SNMPv3, which allows a third-party NMS to monitor equipment performance. 7.1 Network Management This chapter describes the network management system, inter-NE communication management, and intra-NE communication management. 7.2 DCN Management Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN) is a network management data communication channel, with which users can remotely manage and maintain NEs. 7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the U2000 server time. In this way, the U2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.
7.1 Network Management

This chapter describes the network management system, inter-NE communication management, and intra-NE communication management.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
95
Figure 7-1 shows network management. Figure 7-1 Network management
Figure 7-1 illustrates a network that has Huawei equipment deployed at different layers: NEs at sites A-D are OptiX OSN 8800 NEs, NEs at site E are OptiX OSN 1800 NEs, and NEs at site F are OptiX OSN 550/500 NEs.
In Figure 7-1,

Network management system: U2000 and U2000 LCT Inter-NE communication management:
The NEs at sites A and C are gateway NEs (GNEs) and are connected to the external DCN through a switch or router. All the other NEs are non-GNEs that communicate with the NMS through GNEs. The NEs between sites A and D are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over ESC/OSC channels. The NEs between sites E and C are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over ESC channels. The NEs between sites F and C are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over inband channels. Some NEs between sites A and F (NEs connected to an optical or electrical transmission device, such as NEs at site B) are connected with network cables, and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over Ethernet channels (at NM_ETH ports).
Intra-NE communication management: The master and slave subracks implement intra-NE communication for each NE at sites A-D. One NE at site A has three subracks (one master is connected to two slaves).
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
96
Network management involves the following aspects:
Network Management System

The network management system (NMS) provides unified management for OptiX equipment. In compliance with associated ITU-T Recommendations, the NMS uses a standard information management model and object-oriented management technology. The NMS manages alarms, performance, configurations, communication, security, and topologies of the entire optical transmission system. The NMS also gives users end-to-end management capabilities. An NMS helps to improve network quality, lower maintenance costs, and ensure efficient utilization of network resources. The NMS includes two sets of network management software: iManager U2000 (U2000) and iManager U2000 LCT (U2000 LCT). The U2000 is usually installed at a network management center, and most equipment is managed remotely. The LCT provides the ability to configure and maintain individual NEs. The LCT is usually installed on a PC for local access to equipment.
Inter-NE Communication Management

Inter-NE communication management is implemented based on data communication networks (DCNs). A DCN consists of NMSs, GNEs, non-GNEs, and the connections between them. Both NMSs and NEs are nodes of a DCN. The DCN between the NMSs and NEs is called the external DCN, and the DCN between NEs is called the internal DCN.
An external DCN is a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN) and uses the TCP/IP protocol for communication. It provides communication between NMSs and between the NMS server and GNEs. An internal DCN uses the HWECC or TCP/IP protocol to provide communication between NEs. NEs support inband DCN and outband DCN. The outband DCN uses DCC overhead bytes as physical DCN channels. The inband DCN uses Ethernet service channels as physical DCN channels.
7.2 DCN Management

Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN) is a network management data communication channel, with which users can remotely manage and maintain NEs. Table 7-1 lists the DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. Table 7-1 DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Item Purpose and benefit Inband DCN NM information is transmitted through the service channels provided by managed equipment. Therefore, no extra equipment or DCN is required. This reduces Outband DCN NM information is transmitted on non-service channels.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
97
Item
Inband DCN operating expenditure.
Outband DCN
Feature
Flexible networking: NM information is encapsulated into Ethernet frames and carries a fixed VLAN ID to get separated from the service data. The NM information is transmitted with services on service channels. Configurable VLAN priorities for inband DCN packets HWECC IP
High reliability: Outband DCN uses dedicated maintenance channels. Therefore, an NMC can construct a DCN network with managed equipment in various ways, such as E1 private lines and Ethernet; in addition, you can obtain NM information in time even when faults occur on service channels.
Networking technology
HWECC IP OSI
Application scenario Resource allocation mode
Packet network N/A
TDM network Channel types: D1-D3 and D4-D12 Running mode:
Mode 1: 32 channels using D1-D3 bytes Mode 2: 12 channels using D1-D3 bytes or 6 channels using D4-D12 bytes
7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs

With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the U2000 server time. In this way, the U2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs. When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000, the time at which such alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the U2000. This may cause trouble in fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the U2000 provides three time synchronization schemes: synchronizing with the U2000 server, synchronizing with the NTP server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server.
If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000 server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
server time manually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time of the workstation or computer where the U2000 server is located. This scheme features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time.
If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the NTP server or synchronizing with the standard NTP server, the NE time and the U2000 time are synchronized with the NTP server time or the standard NTP server time automatically. The NTP server can be the U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme enables the U2000 and NEs to have a time accuracy of one nanosecond in theory, and applies to a network with high requirement for time accuracy.
NTP Network Application

Figure 7-2 shows a network in which NTP is used to ensure synchronization across the network. Figure 7-2 Network using NTP to ensure synchronization
Time server
The highest-level time server
NMS server
The middle-level time server Clients
NE2 NE1 NE3 NE5 NE4
As shown in Figure 7-2, the equipment in the network can be classified into three categories:

The highest-level time server: the 0-level time server The middle-level time server: the 1- or 2-level time server that obtains time information from the higher-level time server and provides time information for the lower-level time server Clients: obtaining time information only
In application, the server and clients can be configured as follows:
Choose the NMS server as the time server for NEs. The NMS server can be set as the highest-level time server, or set to obtain time information from other time servers.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
99
NEs can only be set as the client, obtaining time information from the specified time server.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
100
8 Operation and Maintenance
8
About This Chapter
Applica tion Scenari o Routine maintena nce Function
Operation and Maintenance
Routine equipment maintenance and troubleshooting are essential to ensure that a network runs properly. The OptiX OSN 550 provides strong maintenance capabilities. Table 8-1 lists the maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. Table 8-1 Maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Description
Alarm and performance management
Provides audible and visual alarms warn of emergencies to help network administrators take prompt action. Provides running status indicators and alarm indicators on all boards to help administrators locate and handle faults quickly. Provides the alarm input and output function to facilitate alarm collection for external devices. Dynamically monitors the operation and alarm status of all NEs using the NMS. Detects alarms and performance of a standby system control board. Stores results of sixteen consecutive 15-minute performance monitoring events, that is, four hours of performance events divided into 15-minute segments. Stores results of six consecutive 24-hour performance monitoring events, that is, six days of performance events divided into 24-hour segments.
RMON
Monitors data from different network segments on a transmission network. RMON supplements simple Ethernet performance management tools, and can be used on a wide range of networks.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
101
Applica tion Scenari o
Function
Description
Upgrade and loading of board software and NE software
Supports in-service upgrades and loading of board software and NE software. Supports remote loading of board software and field programmable gate array (FPGA). Supports error-proof loading and resumable loading.
Voltage check Automatic search for optical fibers Automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
Measures input voltages and detects undervoltage and overvoltage states. Supports the fiber auto-discovery function on the NMS.
SDH single-mode optical ports support the ALS function. Packet Ethernet boards support the setting of upper threshold or lower threshold of input optical power.
Port impedance query Optical module information query Outdoor cabinet monitoring Power consumption control
Supports the query of port impedance on the NMS. Allows the NMS to query information about optical modules, including single-mode/multi-mode, rate level, supplier, production date, and wavelength. Monitors outdoor cabinets by means of the monitoring ports on AUX boards.

Computes system power consumption. Monitors the total power consumption of an NE, and reports an alarm if the total power consumption exceeds the power consumption threshold of the NE. Supports the query of the power consumption of an NE/board by using the NMS.
Storage of the ID and IP address of an NE Port information query OAM ETH OAM
The backplane stores IDs and IP addresses of NEs, and the active SCC board reads these from the backplane. Queries communication protocols in use, status, functions, and names of ports used for external communication and physical ports connected to networks. Uses outband packets to detect and monitor the connectivity and performance of service trails. The process does not affect services. Detects and locates ATM faults, and monitors ATM performance.
ATM OAM MPLS OAM
Detects and locates faults on an MPLS network, and works with MPLS APS to protect services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
102
Function
Description
MPLS OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. MPLS-TP OAM can detect, identify, and locate faults on packet switched networks, and notify NEs of the faults, so the NEs can implement protection switching. MPLS-TP OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Provides a one-click data collection function for fault data to reduce data collection time before service recovery. Users can collect fault data selectively and can stop a collection process manually.
MPLS-TP OAM
Fault locating
One-click data collection
Loopback Remote maintenance PRBS
Service boards support inloops and outloops on ports to facilitate fault location. Maintenance personnel can use a public telephone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 550 equipment.
An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used as an instrument to transmit and receive unframed services in order to analyze whether service paths are faulty. An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used to analyze itself or the entire network. The PRBS function substitutes for a test instrument during deployment or fault location.
Warm/Cold resets
System control, switching, and timing boards and service boards support warm and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect services.
Hot swap
Service boards, system control, switching, and timing boards, power supply boards, and fan boards support hot swapping. Pluggable optical modules can be hot-swapped. Service cables and auxiliary cables can be hot-swapped.
Port mirroring
Supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services. A traditional NE database backup may end up with a failure. The quick fault rectification function uses NMS configuration data as the data restoration source to rebuild
103
Quick fault rectification
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Function
Description
the NE configuration database. Other Hot patch loading Alarm reporting upon removal of important peripheral storage devices NSF Supports the hot patch loading function. Running software can be upgraded without being interrupted. When a CF storage card is removed, the equipment reports a security alarm.
NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. When the control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures that the data services are not interrupted, ensuring transmission of the key services on the network.
8.1
Maintenance Support (Packet)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features including MPLS OAM, ETH-OAM, ATM OAM, and RMON in the packet domain. 8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the TDM domain. 8.3 Upgrade Methods If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading and package diffusion.
8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet)

This section describes the maintenance functions and features including MPLS OAM, ETH-OAM, ATM OAM, and RMON in the packet domain.
8.1.1 TP-Assist
The TP-Assist is an end-to-end service configuration, one-click commissioning, and one-click fault locating tool. It boosts the operation and maintenance (O&M) efficiency for PTN networks. The OptiX OSN equipment provides TP-Assist functionality to simplify operation and improve efficiency in service configuration, installation, commissioning, fault diagnosis, and routine maintenance. Table 8-2 describes the TP-Assist OAM system applied to PSNs.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
104
Table 8-2 TP-Assist O&M system applied to PSNs Function End-to-end service configuration Sub-Item End-to-end configuration of packet services Alarm deployment along with service configuration Application Supports end-to-end configuration of E-Line (VPWS), E-LAN (VPLS), VPWS+VPLS, native E-Line, and native E-LAN services. Automatically configures and starts service continuity checks (CCs), tunnel OAM CCs, and PW OAM CCs immediately after services are configured in end-to-end mode. Supports the following end-to-end, one-click OAM connectivity tests: ETH-OAM LB, tunnel ping, and PW ping. Supports the following one-click OAM performance management items of Ethernet services, tunnels, and PWs: packet loss, delay, and delay jitter. Supports Layer 3 IP ping responses on a per-NE basis or in end-to-end mode at UNI ports on transport networks. Loops back Layer 2 E-LAN services at specific points and tests whether services are blocked. Diagnoses service interruptions and service performance deterioration. Supports the following performance measurement functions:
One-click commissioning
One-click service connectivity test One-click service performance test
One-click fault diagnosis
Layer 3 IP ping
Service loopbacks
One-click, intelligent fault diagnosis Performance measurement and monitoring
Volume measurement: measures traffic volumes by port, flow, V-UNI, PW, ingress tunnel, or queue, and displays volumes in graphical form on the NMS to illustrate bandwidth usage. Measurement of congestion-caused packet loss: measures congestion-caused lost packets by flow, PW, or egress queue. This function helps learn the actual operating status of an NE and diagnose packet loss.
Supports the following performance monitoring functions:
Threshold-crossing monitoring: volume threshold crossing alarms Flow monitoring: no-traffic alarms Packet loss monitoring: packet loss threshold crossing alarms
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
105
Function
Sub-Item Half-duplex alarm for ETH ports
Application Reports a warning alarm if the working mode of an ETH port is set to auto-negotiation but the ETH port works in half-duplex mode.
8.1.2 MPLS OAM

The MPLS OAM mechanism supported by the equipment includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Tunnel OAM and PW OAM both provide the complete fault detection and locating mechanism.
Tunnel OAM
Description The tunnel OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the tunnel layer of an MPLS network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved.
Objectives and benefits As a key bearer technology for the scalable next generation network (NGN), MPLS provides multi-service capabilities with ensured QoS. In addition, MPLS introduces a unique network layer (tunnel), which may cause some faults. Therefore, an MPLS network must have the OAM capability. By providing a tunnel OAM mechanism independent of any upper layer or lower layer, the tunnel OAM supports the following features:
Provides query-on-demand and consecutive detections so that at any moment you can learn whether the monitored tunnel has defects. Detects, analyzes, and locates any defect that occurs, and notifies the NMS of the relevant information. Triggers a protection switching immediately after a defect or fault occurs on a link. Monitors the performance events indicating packet loss ratio, delay, and jitter in real time and reports them to the NMS.
PW OAM
Description The PW OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the PW layer of a network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved.
Objectives and benefits The equipment performs PW encapsulation on service packets, and then transmits the service packets over tunnels. The network consists of two layers: tunnel and PW. Tunnels use tunnel OAM for maintenance and management, and PWs use PW OAM for maintenance and management. Currently, the equipment can detect the connectivity of a certain PW through ping packets, and then reports the result to the NMS.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
106
8.1.3 MPLS-TP OAM

MPLS-TP OAM is defined by MPLS-TP. It is compatible with existing MPLS OAM standards and focuses on particularity of transport networks. MPLS-TP OAM is available in two technical solutions: solution based on bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) extension and solution based on ITU-T G.8113.1. This section describes the solution based on ITU-T G.8113.1 extension. ITU-T G.8113.1-compliant MPLS-TP OAM applies to most data communication equipment and packet switching equipment, and therefore can provide end-to-end OAM for PSNs consisting of data communication equipment and packet switching equipment. Figure 8-2 Application of MPLS-TP OAM on a PSN consisting of data communication equipment and packet switching equipment
MPLS-TP OAM
PSN NodeB PW1
MPLS tunnel
RNC
PW2 MPLS tunnel
NodeB
CX equipment
RNC
Packet switching equipment
Equipment with MPLS-TP OAM functionality can meet carrier-class data transmission needs.
8.1.4 ETH-OAM
ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly supports service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
107
Definition
Based on the MAC layer, the ETH-OAM protocol performs OAM operations for the Ethernet by transmitting OAM packets. This protocol is irrelevant to the transmission medium. The OAM packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact on the other layers of the Ethernet. In addition, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH-OAM protocol occupies low bandwidths. Therefore, this protocol does not affect services carried on links. ITU-T and IEEE have researches on ETH-OAM. Currently, Huawei Ethernet service processing boards have realized the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Wherein, IEEE 802.1ag define Ethernet service OAM standards, and IEEE 802.3ah defines Ethernet port OAM standards. As shown in Figure 8-2, the combination of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah provides a complete Ethernet OAM solution. Figure 8-3 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
IEEE 802.3ah IEEE 802.1ag IEEE 802.3ah
P Router 1 CE1 PE1 CE2
P PE2 CE3 Router 3
Router 2
CE4
Access layer Custom layer
Access layer Core layer Custom layer OptiX NE
Ethernet service OAM focuses on the maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. Based on services, Ethernet service OAM implements end-to-end detection in the unit of "maintenance domain" and performs segmental management on each network segment that is involved in the same service on a network. Ethernet port OAM focuses on the maintenance of point-to-point Ethernet link between two directly-connected devices in Ethernet in the first mile (EFM). Ethernet port OAM does not focus on a specific service. It maintains the point-to-point Ethernet link by performing OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault check, remote loopback, and selfloop check.
Purpose
With the continuous development of the Ethernet, especially when LANs evolve to WANs, operators pay more attention to equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, administration and maintenance (OAM) in the transmission network are required urgently. Therefore, ETH-OAM is developed. A comparison of ETH-OAM and existing OAM and fault locating methods is provided as follows:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
108
When a loopback is performed at a port, all packets on the port are looped back. Therefore, the loopback method cannot be used if only a specific service needs to be looped back. ETH-OAM can detect hardware faults. ETH-OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.
8.1.5 ATM OAM

This section provides the definition of ATM OAM and describes its purpose.
Definition
ATM OAM is used for detecting and locating ATM faults, and monitoring ATM performance. In this document, ATM OAM refers to OAM only at the ATM layer and implements various OAM functions by means of specific ATM OAM cells.
Purpose
ATM OAM provides segment-based ATM OAM between the CE and the PE and end-to-end-based ATM OAM between CEs. As shown in Figure 8-3, ATM OAM cells are transmitted and detected between the CE and the PE, or between the CEs to monitor the ATM link. Figure 8-4 Typical application of ATM OAM
CE1 (NodeB) PE1 PE2 CE2 (RNC)
ATM cell stream (VP level or VC level)
Segment check
Segment check
End-to-end check
Packet transmission equipment
8.1.6 RMON
By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109
Currently, the management of the Ethernet performance for transmission products is relevantly simple. In the case of the management of Ethernet ports, the management of the performance data of the ports is required. What's more, as the network is becoming complex, a method for managing network sections is required. Thus, the RMON emerges and the RMON should have the following features:

All statistics data is saved at the agent and the out-of-service operation on the manager is supported. History data is saved for the fault diagnosis. Errors are detected and reported. Detailed data is provided. Multiple management stations are supported.
Based on the preceding purposes, the RMON defines a serial of statistic formats and functions to realize the data exchange between the control stations and detection stations that complies with the RMON standards. To meet the requirements of different networks, the RMON provides flexible detection modes and control mechanism. What's more, the RMON provides error diagnosis, planning and information receiving of the performance events of the entire network.
8.1.7 PRBS
Boards with E1 ports provide the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) functional module, which is used for network self-test and maintenance. You can determine whether the working channel on the UNI/NNI side is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. The PRBS functional module is equivalent to a simple instrument that transmits and receives unframed services. Bit errors detected by the PRBS functional module help diagnose the faults on service paths and locate the faults on fibers or boards. By using the PRBS function, you can analyze the local NE and the entire network. Therefore, you can perform a test without a real instrument during the deployment or fault locating.
8.1.8 CES Alarm Transmission

The OptiX OSN 550 uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms. CES alarm transparent transmission involves transmitting local CES alarms to the remote end, and inserting corresponding alarms to notify the remote end of faults in the local end. Depending on the position where the alarm is generated, CES alarm transparent transmission can be between AC sides, and from the NNI side to the AC side.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission Between AC Sides

There are two scenarios where CES alarms are transparently transmitted between AC sides.
The fault information on the AC link or port is transmitted through the PSN as follows:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
110
Figure 8-5 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (1)
If PE1 detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC1 side, PE1 returns RDI to upstream and informs PE2 of the fault through the L field of control word. Upon receiving the control word, PE2 reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm and inserts AIS to the AC2 side.
The service alarms on the AC side are transparently transmitted through the PSN as follows:
Figure 8-6 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (2)
If the RNC detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC2 side, the RNC returns RDI to PE2; PE2 reports the RAI alarm and informs PE1 of the fault through the L/M field of control word. Upon receiving the control word, PE1 reports the RAI alarm and returns RDI to AC1.
The SAToP encapsulation mode does not support the M field, and therefore cannot transparently transmit the RAI alarm.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission from the NNI Side to the AC Side
Figure 8-6 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
111
Figure 8-7 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side
When detecting that packet loss ratio continuously beyond the preset threshold, PE2 inserts the AIS alarm into AC2, and uses the R field in the control word to transmit the information to PE1. Then, PE1 reports the RAI alarm based on the R field.
8.1.9 Port Mirroring

For the existing complex networks, OptiX OSN equipment has already provided various effective fault diagnosis methods. However, the methods require path overheads or even interrupt service. Therefore, a fast fault diagnosis method that does not affect services is urgently required. Port mirroring effectively addresses this requirement. Port mirroring has the following features:

Port mirroring applies to online fault diagnosis. It replicates the traffic at one port to another port, and then an analyzer is used to locate faults. After port mirroring is used, traffic can be monitored in real time using an analyzer.
As shown in Figure 8-7, a port on NE1 is the mirror source port and another port on NE1 is the mirror destination port. NE1 replicates the traffic at the mirror source port to the mirror destination port. An analyzer is used to analyze the traffic or to monitor the traffic in real time without affecting the services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
112
Figure 8-8 Typical networking for port mirroring
Mirror Source Function Point NodeB Mirror Observation Point NE1 (Monitored/Monitor)
Analyst
NE2 NE3
Normal Service Mirror Service RNC
8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM)

This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the TDM domain.
8.2.1 PRBS
Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test. For details, see PRBS.
8.2.2 ETH-OAM
ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly supports service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating. For details, see ETH-OAM.
8.2.3 RMON
By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections. For details, see RMON.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
113
8.2.4 Data Test Frame

The test frame is a data packet that is used to test the connectivity status of the network on the SDH side that transmits Ethernet services. The test frame is mainly used for commissioning Ethernet services or locating Ethernet service faults. Configuring test frames does not affect services. The test frame function complies with the Huawei internal standard, and can be transmitted and received only between VCTRUNK ports.
8.3 Upgrade Methods

If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading and package diffusion. Table 8-3 lists the upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550. Table 8-3 Upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550 Upgrade Method Definition Package Loading With a software package description file, a software package functions as a logical package of required software. This logical package can be uploaded to upgrade an entire NE. Package Diffusion With a software package description file, a software package functions as a logical package of required software. The logical package is diffused and almost synchronously loaded to all NEs on a network. This upgrade method is more efficient.
Application scenario
One NE needs to be upgraded. System control boards and other boards must support package loading. There are CF cards on system control boards. All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI. There is no need to care about which boards to upgrade or which files to update.
More than one NE needs to be upgraded. System control boards and other boards must support package loading. There are CF cards on system control boards. All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI. There is no need to care about which boards to upgrade or which files to update. Software packages are diffused. Network load and network bandwidth are
Characteristic
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
114
Upgrade Method
Package Loading
Package Diffusion both shared.
Applicable version
V100R003C00 and later versions support this upgrade method.
V100R003C00 and later versions support this upgrade method.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
115
9 Security Management
9
About This Chapter
9.1 Authentication Management 9.2 Authorization Management 9.3 Network Security Management
Security Management
The OptiX OSN 550 allows NE security management to be implemented by various means.
For security concerns, only an authenticated user can log in to an NE.
Authorization management allows different authorities for different users when they operate an NE. This effectively protects an NE against inappropriate operations.
The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in networks, is the precondition for the NMS to manage the NEs. 9.4 System Security Management The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly. 9.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 550 supports system security log management and Syslog management.
9.1 Authentication Management

For security concerns, only an authenticated user can log in to an NE.

NE login management: You can successfully log in to an NE only after entering the correct user name and password. NE user switching: One client allows only one user to operate an NE at a time. For this reason, if multiple NE users log in to an NE, the NE users need to be switched to ensure that the configuration data is unique. Forcibly logging other users out of an NE: To avoid errors owing to simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to an NE, one user can forcibly log a lower-level user out from the NE. NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to an NE.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
116

NE configuration locking: You can lock the function of configuring certain function modules on an NE to prevent other users from configuring the modules. You can query users that have logged in to an NE.
9.2 Authorization Management

Authorization management allows different authorities for different users when they operate an NE. This effectively protects an NE against inappropriate operations.

Management of NE users
Five user authority levels are available in an ascending order: monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level. Based on network management systems, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users, CMD NE users, and general NE users. You can create a user, assign an authority level for the user, and specify the user flag. You can change a user name, a password, an authority level, and a user flag. You can delete a user.
Management of NE user groups:
By default, five user groups are available with authorities in an ascending order: monitor group, operator group, maintenance personnel group, administrator group, and super administrator group. You can change the group to which a user belongs.
9.3 Network Security Management

The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in networks, is the precondition for the NMS to manage the NEs. Communication between the NMS and NEs can be implemented based on the Access Control List (ACL), Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), or Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) protocol.
ACL Protocol
ACL rules are configured to filter received IP packets. This controls the data traffic on networks and protects against malicious attacks. You can set basic ACL rules or advanced ACL rules, based on the required system security level.

For an NE that requires a low security level, you can configure basic ACL rules so that the NE checks only the source addresses of received IP packets. For an NE that requires a high security level, you can configure advanced ACL rules. In this case, the NE checks the source addresses, sink addresses, source ports, sink ports, and protocol types of received IP packets.
If both basic and advanced ACL rules are configured, an NE uses only advanced ACL rules to check received IP packets. In addition, ACL rules support the following operations:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
117

Queries of ACL rules Modification of ACL rules Deletion of ACL rules
SSL Protocol
The SSL protocol is used to protect the integrity and security of data.
RADIUS Protocol
RADIUS provides a complete network security solution. After a RADIUS server verifies that the user name and password of a user are valid, the server allows a certain authority for the user, and provides services to the user. Carriers' RADIUS servers manage all the user accounts and user attributes of the 550. To log in to an OptiX OSN 550 NE, you must apply for a user account to the carrier. When you attempt to log in to an OptiX OSN 550 NE, the RADIUS server verifies the user name and password that you have entered. If the verification fails, a login error is reported. The OptiX OSN 550 supports the shielding function when being connected to a network port management device. That is, when being connected to a network port on an OptiX OSN 550 NE, a network port management device manages only the connected OptiX OSN 550 NE, and cannot access the other devices that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 NE through ECCs. With this function, even if an OptiX OSN 550 NE in the insecure domain is accessed illegally, the NEs that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 NE will not be illegally operated.
Security FTP
Security File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) works at the secure shell (SSH) connection layer, and extends support for FTP security based on SSH-provided fundamental services like encryption and authentication.
In security, FTP transmits plain text and supports only password authentication, whereas SFTP transmits cipher text and supports both password authentication and cipher key authentication. Authentication by cipher key is safer than authentication by password. SFTP needs to perform encryption and decryption and theoretically has a lower transmission efficiency than FTP. However, benefiting from specialized improvement design, SFTP generally has a higher transmission efficiency than FTP. SFTP can load packages, upload/download databases, upload log files, and upload/download a single file. NEs can work only as SFTP clients and cannot work as SFTP servers. In addition, SFTP works based on TCP connections and requires IP routes between NEs and SSH servers. Therefore, SFTP service can be deployed only at gateway NEs.
9.4 System Security Management

The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly.

Account management: You can create/modify/delete/query accounts. Uniqueness and complexity of accounts: All accounts held in an NE are unique. An account consists of 4 to 16 characters.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
118
Length and complexity of passwords: A password consists of 8 to 16 characters and contains all the following types of characters: lowercase character, uppercase character, digit, and special character. A password cannot be any of the five recently used passwords, the user name, or reversed user name. Active periods of passwords: Each password has an active period. After the active period of a password expires, the password can be used for only three logins. For a common user's password, the shortest active period is one day. A common user can change the password only after the shortest active period expires. Storage of encrypted passwords: Encrypted by using the message digest algorithm 5 (MD5), passwords are held in a system. Querying about online users: An administrator account can query online users.
9.5 Log Management

The OptiX OSN 550 supports system security log management and Syslog management.
System Security Log Management

The system security log of an NE records all operations and operation results on the NE. By querying the system security log, an administrator can trace and check operations of users.

You can query the system security log of an NE. You can forward the system security log to the Syslog server.
Syslog Management
The Syslog service is used for the security management of NEs. Different information is transmitted to the Syslog server in a format compliant with the Syslog protocol so that maintenance personnel can monitor NEs easily. The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following functions related to the Syslog protocol:

Enabling and disabling the Syslog protocol Setting the transmission mode of the Syslog protocol to UDP (by default) or TCP Adding or deleting Syslog servers Configuration of multiple Syslog servers and transmission of logs to multiple servers at the same time Reporting relevant alarms when the Syslog server fails to communicate with NEs
Figure 9-1 illustrates log transmission on a network by means of the Syslog protocol. To ensure the security of system logs, at least two Syslog servers are required on a transmission network. NEs communicate with Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. NEs communicate with each other in many modes, such as ECC and IP over DCC.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
119
Figure 9-1 Log transmission by means of the Syslog protocol

NE B
NMS
NE A (client) ECC/IP over DCC TCP/IP Real-time security log
NE C (client)
Syslog server B
Syslog server A
NE D
A Syslog server is a workstation or server that stores the system logs of all NEs on a network. Forwarding gateway NEs receive system logs from other NEs, and then forward these system logs to Syslog servers, for example, NE A and NE C in Figure 9-1.
When NEs communicate in IP mode, each NE can directly communicate with two different Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. Therefore, you need to configure the IP addresses and port numbers of the Syslog servers on an NE. The NE transmits the system log to two Syslog servers by using the automatic routing function of the IP protocol. You do not need to configure any forwarding gateway NE. When NEs communicate in ECC mode, the NEs that are not directly connected to Syslog servers cannot communicate with Syslog servers. The logs of these NEs need to be transmitted to the gateway NEs that can communicate with Syslog servers directly. Then, the gateway NEs forward the logs to Syslog servers. Therefore, you need to configure forwarding gateway NEs. For example, you can configure NE A as the forwarding NE of NE D.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
120
10 Technical Specifications
10
About This Chapter
10.1 General Specifications
Technical Specifications
This chapter describes general specifications, packet performance indicators, TDM performance indicators, port specifications, optical module specifications, indicator status explanation, and environment indicators of the equipment.
This section lists the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability. 10.2 Packet Performance Indicators This section lists the equipment's packet performance indicators. 10.3 TDM Performance Indicators This section lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators. 10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the equipment supports. 10.5 Optical Port Specifications This section lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports and GE optical ports. 10.6 Colored Optical Ports This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment. 10.7 Electrical Port Specifications This section lists the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical ports. 10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications This section lists the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports, asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, and external clock ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
121
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation This section provides status explanation for indicators on boards. 10.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 550 has passed many safety certifications. 10.11 Environmental Specifications The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environments for storage, transportation, and operation.
10.1 General Specifications

This section lists the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability. Table 10-1 lists the general specifications of the OptiX OSN 550. Table 10-1 General specifications of the OptiX OSN 550 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumptio n Description 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D) 3.5 kg (net weight of a chassis that contains one fan board and two PIU boards)

Maximum power consumption: 240 W Typical power consumption: 149 W Board configuration for typical power consumption: 2 x PCXLX + 3 x EM6F + 1 x MD1 + 1 x FAN + 2 x PIU.
SLOT SLOT 10 91 SLOT (PIU) SLOT (PIU) 11 93 SLOT (FAN) SLOT (FAN) 9 92 (PIU) (PIU) SLOT 7 SLOT 7 (CST/CSH) (PCXLX) SLOT 5 (EXT) SLOT 3 SLOT 3(EXT) (MD1) SLOT 1 ) SLOT 1(EXT (EM6F)
SLOT SLOT 88(PCXLX) (CST/CSH)

SLOT 6 (EXT) SLOT (EXT) SLOT 44 (EM6F) SLOT (EXT ) SLOT 22 (EF6F)
Heat consumptio n Power supply performanc e
Maximum heat consumption: 819 BTU/h Typical heat consumption: 485 BTU/h DC power supply

Rated voltage: -48 V or -60 V Voltage range: -38.4 V to -72 V Rated voltage: 110 V or 220 V Voltage range: 100 V to 240 V
AC power supply

Fuse capacity Electromag
DC power supply: 20 A AC power supply: 5 A
Complies with EMC Class A.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
122
Item netic compatibili ty Predicted reliability
Description
System availability: 0.9999965 Annual average repair rate: < 1.5% Mean time to repair (MTTR): 1 hour Mean time between failures (MTBF): 33.08 years
In the case of OptiX OSN 550 equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
10.2 Packet Performance Indicators

This section lists the equipment's packet performance indicators. Table 10-2 lists the OptiX OSN 550's packet performance indicators. Table 10-2 Packet system performance specifications It e m Pr ot ec tio n Specifications
MPLS/MP LS-TP tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) MPLS/MP LS-TP PW APS
64
NOTE MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share resources.
Numbe r of MPLS/ MPLSTP PW APS protecti on groups Numbe r of bound membe rs
64
NOTE MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share resources.
512
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
123
It e m
Specifications
Link-state pass through (LPT) Link aggregatio n group (LAG)
16
Numbe r of LAGs Numbe r of membe rs in a LAG Numbe r of instanc es support ed by a port Numbe r of port groups Numbe r of ports provide d by port groups
16
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
16
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) on the packet plane M ai MPLS/MP LS-TP
128
NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
124
It e m nt en an ce
Specifications
tunnel OAM MPLS/MP LS-TP PW OAM ETH OAM (MPLS/M PLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS/MP LS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.)
MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
128
NOTE MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
Numbe r of mainten ance domain s (MDs) Numbe r of mainten ance associat ions (MAs) Numbe r of mainten ance associat ion end points (MEPs) Numbe r of mainten ance associat ion interme diate points (MIPs)
64
64
64
64
ATM OAM Se rv ic es E-Line services
8K 1K
NOTE Native ETH services and PWE3 ETH services (VPWSs) share resources.
E-LAN
Numbe r of
Native ETH services: 1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
125
It e m
Specifications
services
E-LAN services (E-LA N VSIs) support ed by an NE (VSI is short for virtual switch instanc e.) Numbe r of logical ports support ed by a VSI (Native ETH) Numbe r of logical ports support ed by a VSI (VPLS) Numbe r of virtual user-net work interfac es (V-UNI s) support ed by an NE (VPLS) Numbe r of split
PWE3 ETH services (VPLSs): 128
NOTE Native ETH services and PWE3 ETH services (VPLSs) cannot coexist on the same NE.
1K
128
Number of V-UNIs 32 64 128 256 512 1024
Number of VLANs 4096 2047 1023 511 255 127
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
126
It e m
Specifications
horizon groups support ed by a VSI Numbe r of logical ports support ed by an NE CES services ATM services 256 Numbe r of local services Numbe r of remote services M ult iLi nk Po int -t oPo int Pr ot oc ol ( M LP P P) IG M P Number of ML-PPP groups supported by an NE Number of PPP links supported by an NE Number of member links supported in an ML-PPP group 64 128 1K
256
504
16
Number of multicast groups
512
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
127
It e m sn oo pi ng
Specifications
Number of members in a multicast group Number of port weighted random early discard (WRED) policies Number of virtual user-netwo rk interface (V-UNI) ingress policies Number of port policies Number of Differentia ted Services (DiffServ) domains Number of port flows Number of V-UNI ingress flows Number of traffic classificati on rules Number of access control lists (ACLs)
1K
Q oS
256
256
512 512
512
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
128
It e m Ot he rs
Specifications
Number of MPLS tunnels
Unidirectional: 1K Bidirectional: 512
NOTE One bidirectional MPLS tunnel is counted as two unidirectional MPLS tunnels.
If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must not exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS tunnel carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
Tunnel bandwidth Number of static PWs
10 Gbit/s 1K
NOTE If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must not exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS tunnel carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
PW bandwidth Number of MS-PWs Number of QinQ links MAC addresses
10 Gbit/s 128 1K Numbe r of static MAC address es support ed by an E-LAN Numbe r of MAC address es support ed by E-LAN services Numbe r of 512
16K
16K
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
129
It e m
Specifications
MAC address es support ed by an NE VLAN ID range supported by a port 1 to 4094
10.3 TDM Performance Indicators

This section lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators. Table 10-3 lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators. Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features Item Service Description Service Category Maximum Receiving Capability 26xSTM-1 Service Port Description
Connector
SDH service
S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports STM-1 SFP electrical ports
optical port: LC Electrical port: SAA straight female
14xSTM-4
S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports E1 (75/120-ohm) /T1 (100-ohm)
LC
2xSTM-16
LC
PDH service
252xE1/T1
Anea 96
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
130
Item
Description electrical ports 18xE3/T3 E3 (75-ohm)/T3 (75-ohm) electrical ports 10/100BASET(X)
SMB
Ethernet service:
48xFE 6xGE
RJ45 LC
Ethernet private line (EPL) services Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge) Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1q and 802.1ad bridges)

1000BAS E-SX/LX/ VX/ZX 1000BAS E-T
Protection
SNCP
SNCP at the VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration: 50 ms Ring MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration: 50 ms Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 linear MSP protection groups: 13 Switching duration: 50 ms
Ring MSP
Linear MSP
Maintena nce
PRBS Port mirroring
Supported EFS8 supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services.

Supports local port mirroring. Supports ingress and egress port mirroring.
Synchroni zation
Physical layer clocks:
Including external clocks, line clocks, tributary clocks, and internal clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port). Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
131
Item
Description SSM protocols

Tributary retiming and transparent transmission of tributary clocks Locked mode, holdover mode, and free-run mode
10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board

This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the equipment supports. Table 10-4 lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. Table 10-4 Power consumption and weight of each board that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Board PCX Power Consumption (Room temperature (25C))(W)

Weight (kg) 0.80
PCXLX: 45 PCXX: 44.5 PCXLG/PCXGA: 37 PCXGB: 36.5
CXL MD1 EM6T EM6F EF8F EG4C
21 12.2 10.4 11.3 23

0.50 0.50 0.37 0.40 0.55 4xGE optical ports: 12.5 4xGE electrical ports: 11.0 0.48 0.47 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.85 0.30 0.65 0.60 0.45
EX1 CQ1 SL1D SL4D SL1Q SP3D PL3T EFS8 EGT1
11 11.5 3.5 3.7 4.5 11.9 4.5 13.0 8.3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
132
Board DMD2 AUX PIU APIU FAN
Power Consumption (Room temperature (25C))(W) 0.5 2.2 0.5 20.0 12.0
Weight (kg) 0.72 0.30 0.12 1.93 0.30
10.5 Optical Port Specifications

This section lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports and GE optical ports.
Specifications of STM-1 Optical Ports

Table 10-5 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports. Table 10-5 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 155520 kbit/s S-1.1 15 1261 to 1360 Single-mode LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 40 1263 to 1360 Single-mode LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 80 1480 to 1580 Single-mode LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
133
Item
Value
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Table 10-6 lists the specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports. Table 10-6 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports Parameter Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Type of optical interface Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelength (nm) Operating receive wavelength (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 155520 kbit/s NRZ S-1.1 15 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 1310 1550 L-1.1 40 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -5 to 0 -32 -10 10 1310 1550

Table 10-7 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
134
Table 10-7 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 15 1274 to 1356 L-4.1 40 1280 to 1335 L-4.2 80 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2
Single-mode LC -3 to +2 -28 -8 10
Single-mode LC -3 to +2 -28 -8 10
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-4.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Table 10-8 lists the specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports. Table 10-8 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Paramete r Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Type of optical interface Value 622080 kbit/s NRZ S-4.1 L-4.1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
135
Paramete r Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 15 40
Single-mode LC 1490 1310
1310
1490
1310
1490
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3

Table 10-9 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports. Table 10-9 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Value 2488320 kbit/s S-16.1 15 1260 to 1360 L-16.1 40 1280 to 1335 L-16.2 80 1500 to 1580
136
Item (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value
Single-mode LC -5 to 0 -18 0 8.2
Single-mode LC -2 to +3 -27 -9 8.2
Single-mode LC -2 to +3 -28 -9 8.2
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Specifications of FE Optical Ports

Table 10-10 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports. Table 10-10 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmissio n distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum Value 100BASE-FX Multi-mode LC 2 100BASE-LX Single-mode LC 15 100BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 100BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-30
-28
-34
-34
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
137
Item sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value
-14
-8
-10
-10
10
8.2
10
10
Table 10-11 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports. Table 10-11 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Parameter Type of optical interface Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelength (nm) Operating receive wavelength (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 100Base-BX 15 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 1310 1550 40 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -5 to 0 -32 -10 10 1310 1550
Table 10-12 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
138
Table 10-12 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 148810.00 84459.00 45290.00 23496.00 11973.00 9615.00 8126.00 6188.00 1299.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 744050.00 422295.00 226450.00 117480.00 59865.00 48075.00 40635.00 30940.00 6459.00
44.90 65.90 106.50 182.20 241.10 269.20 292.20 341.90 1133.30
Specifications of GE Optical Ports

Table 10-13 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports. Table 10-13 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum Value 1000BASE-SX Multi-mode LC 0.5 770 to 860 1000BASE-LX Single-mode LC 10 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80 1500 to 1580
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
-17
-20
-23
-23
-3
-3
-3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
139
Item overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value
With different SFP modules, the equipment provides GE optical ports with different types and transmission distances.
Table 10-14 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports. Table 10-14 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Paramete r Type of optical interface Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Value 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
10
40
1310
1490
1310
1490
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
140
Paramete r Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 9 9
Table 10-15 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports. Table 10-15 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 1488095.00 844595.00 452899.00 234962.00 119732.00 96154.00 81274.00 61881.00 12994.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 7440475.00 4222975.00 2264495.00 1174810.00 598660.00 480770.00 406370.00 309405.00 64970.00
9.00 11.80 17.30 25.00 29.20 31.30 33.40 37.40 98.00
Specifications of 10GE Optical Ports

Table 10-16 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports. Table 10-16 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmission distance (km) Value 10GBASE-SR (LAN)/10GBAS E-SW (WAN) Multi-mode LC 0.3 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/10GBAS E-LW (WAN) Single-mode LC 10 10GBASE-ER (LAN)/10GBAS E-EW (WAN) Single-mode LC 40 10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/10GBAS E-ZW (WAN) Single-mode LC 80
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
141
Item Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 840 to 860 1260 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
-1.3 to -7.3
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
-7.5
-11
-15
-24
-1
0.5
-1
-7
8.2
10.6 Colored Optical Ports

This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment.
GE Optical Port
Table 10-17 lists the parameters specified for the colored GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Table 10-17 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength 1,250,000 kbit/s Single-mode LC 40 0 to 5 80 0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
142
Parameter
Value CWDM
range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -19 -28
-3
-9
8.2
8.2
10GE Optical Port

Table 10-18 and Table 10-19 list the parameters specified for the colored 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Table 10-18 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate

LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
Single-mode LC 70 0 to 4 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20

1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23 1571 nm: -22 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-9 8.2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
143
Table 10-19 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM) Parameter Value DWDM Nominal bit rate

LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Central frequency (THz) Central frequency deviation (GHz) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Single-mode LC 40 -1 to +2 80 -1 to +3
192.1 to 196.0 10 -17 -1 9.5
192.1 to 196.0 10 -24 -9 8.2
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Optical Port

Table 10-20 and Table 10-21 list the parameters specified for the colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Table 10-20 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power 155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s (STM-16) Single-mode LC 40 0 to 5 80 0 to 5
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
144
Parameter
Value CWDM
range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 -19 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-3
-9
8.2
8.2
Table 10-21 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM) Parameter Value DWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Central frequency (THz) Central frequency deviation (GHz) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 2,488,320 kbit/s Single-mode LC 120 -1 to +3 192.1 to 196.0 10 -28 -9 8.2
10.7 Electrical Port Specifications

This section lists the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
145
Specifications of E1/T1 Electrical Ports

Table 10-22 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports. Table 10-22 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports Electrical Port Type Code pattern Waveform at the output port Signal bit rate at the output port Allowed attenuation at the input port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Input jitter tolerance Anti-interference capability at the input port Reflection attenuation at the input and output ports Output jitter Mapping jitter Combined jitter Jitter transfer function Port type Anea 96 Complies with ITU-T G.742. Complies with ITU-T G.823. Complies with ITU-T G.824. Complies with ITU-T G.823. Complies with ITU-T G.703. Complies with ITU-T G.703. 1544 kbit/s B8ZS code, AMI code 2048 kbit/s HDB3 code
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824. Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Specifications of E3/T3 Electrical Ports

Table 10-23 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports. Table 10-23 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports Item Bit rate Code pattern Connector Port impedance (ohm) Value 34368 kbit/s HDB3 SMB 75 44736 kbit/s B3ZS SMB 75
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
146
Item Signal bit rate at the output port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance
Value Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Specifications of STM-1 Electrical Ports

Table 10-24 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 electrical ports. Table 10-24 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports Item Bit rate Code pattern Connector Signal bit rate at the output port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance Value 155520 kbit/s CMI SAA straight female Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Specifications of CES/ATM/IMA Service Electrical Ports

Table 10-25 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
147
Table 10-25 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports Item Standard compliance Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Pair in each direction Port type Value ITU-T G.703/G.823 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial pair Anea 96 120 One symmetrical pair
Specifications of Ethernet Electrical Ports

Table 10-26 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports. Table 10-26 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports Service Port GE/FE electrical port GE/FE electrical port GE electrical port Port Rate 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T Code Pattern Manchester coding signals MLT-3 coding signals 4D-PAM5 coding signals Port Type RJ45
Table 10-27 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE electrical ports. Table 10-27 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE electrical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 148810.00 84459.00 45290.00 23496.00 11973.00 9615.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 744050.00 422295.00 226450.00 117480.00 59865.00 48075.00
12.80 17.90 28.00 48.40 89.40 109.80
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
148
Item Frame Length (Bytes) 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00
Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 8126.00 6188.00 1299.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 40635.00 30940.00 6459.00
129.00 167.50 773.10
Table 10-28 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports. Table 10-28 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 1488095.00 844595.00 452899.00 234962.00 119732.00 96154.00 81274.00 61881.00 12994.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 7440475.00 4222975.00 2264495.00 1174810.00 598660.00 480770.00 406370.00 309405.00 64970.00
7.00 7.40 8.40 10.60 14.70 17.00 18.90 22.60 83.40
10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications

This section lists the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports, asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, and external clock ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
149
External Clock Ports

Table 10-29 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external clock ports Item External synchronous source Frequency accuracy Pull-in or pull-out range Noise generation Noise toleration Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance Synchronization clock transfer accuracy < 50 ppb Value 2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) In compliance with ITU-T G.813
External Time Ports

Table 10-30 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external time ports Item Port type Value

1PPS+TOD DCLS
Electrical specifications Protocol type
RS-422

1PPS+TOD: UBX and NMEA DCLS: IRIG-B (DC)
Synchronous Data Ports

Table 10-31 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's synchronous data ports Item Transmission channel Bit rate (kbit/s) Port type Port characteristics Value Byte F1 in the SDH overhead 64 Codirectional In compliance with ITU-T G.703
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
150
Asynchronous Data Ports

Table 10-32 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's asynchronous data ports Item Transmission channel Bit rate (kbit/s) Port characteristics Value User-defined byte in the SDH overhead 19.2 In compliance with RS-232
Orderwire Ports
Table 10-33 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's orderwire ports Item Transmission channel Orderwire type Pair in each direction Impedance (ohm) Value Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead Addressing call One symmetrical pair 600
Outdoor Cabinet Monitoring Ports

Table 10-34 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's outdoor cabinet monitoring ports Item Port characteristics Value In compliance with RS-485
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation

This section provides status explanation for indicators on boards.
There is no indicator on the OptiX OSN 550 chassis.
Table 10-35 provides status explanation for indicators on the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
151
Table 10-35 Status explanation for indicators on the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty.
Applicable Board PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/CXL/MD1/EM 6T/EM6F/EF8F/EG 4C/EX1/CQ1/SL1D/ SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/ PL3T/EFS8/EGT1/ AUX
The board is not working or created. There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/CXL/EM6T/E M6F/EFS8
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
On (green)
The upper layer software is being initialized. The software is running properly. The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable
On (red)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
152
Indicator
State
Meaning storage card is faulty.
Applicable Board
Off
The board is not powered on or works in low-power mode. The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system/service is normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system/service. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system/service.
SYNC
On (green) On (red)
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/CXL
SRV
On (green) On (red)
On (yellow)
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/CXL/MD1/EM 6T/EM6F/EF8F/EG 4C/EX1/CQ1/SL1D/ SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/ PL3T/EFS8/EGT1/ AUX
Off
For a PCX board:
In an unprotected system, there is no power supplied to the system. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
For a service board, no service is configured. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. In an unprotected system, the board has been activated. In a 1+1 protected system, the board works PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/CXL/EGT1
ACT
On (green)
Off
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
153
Indicator
State
Meaning as the standby one.
Applicable Board
In an unprotected system, the board is not activated. EM6F/EGT1
LINK1/LINK2
On (green)
The GE port is connected correctly, but is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE port is not connected or is abnormal. The received optical power is excessively high. The received optical power is excessively low. The transmitted optical power is excessively high. The transmitted optical power is excessively low. Any of the following states (including but not limited to) occurs:
Blinks (yellow)
Off
OPM
Blinks (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off Blinks (red) once every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off Blinks (yellow) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off Blinks (yellow) once every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off Off
EGT1
The optical power is normal. No optical module is installed. An incorrect optical module is installed. The E2ROM information about the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
154
Indicator
State
Meaning installed optical module cannot be read correctly.
Applicable Board
The optical fiber is disconnected or the port is disabled. PCX (PCXLX/PCXLG)/S L1D/SL4D/SL1Q/C XL/CQ1
LOS/LOS1/LOS2/L OS3/LOS4
On (red)
The optical port on the board is reporting an R_LOS alarm. The optical port on the board receives too strong power. The optical port on the board receives too weak power. The optical port on the board is reporting an MS_RDI alarm. The optical port on the board is free of R_LOS alarms. The port is connected correctly (link up), but is not receiving or transmitting data. The port on the board receives too strong power. The port on the board receives too weak power. The port is connected correctly (link up), and is receiving and transmitting data. The optical fiber is not connected to the port, or the port is abnormal (link
Blinks (red) three times every second Blinks (red) once every second Blinks (red) once every three seconds
Off
L/A
On (green)
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PC XLG/PCXGA/PCX GB)/EF8F/EG4C/E X1
Blinks (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off Blinks (red) once every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off Blinks (orange)
Off
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
155
Indicator
State
Meaning down/LOS).
Applicable Board
PWR
On (green) Off
Power is being supplied. Power is off or power supplies are connected incorrectly. The FAN board is working properly. The FAN board is free of critical/major alarms. The FAN board is free of minor alarms. The FAN board is not powered on or is not installed. The NE has a critical/major alarm. The NE has a minor alarm. The NE is free of critical/major/minor alarms. The voltage of the input power is within the specified range. Undervoltage or overvoltage occurs in the input power. The voltage of the output power is within the specified range. Undervoltage or overvoltage occurs in the output power. The rectifier module is faulty. In normal situations, the indicator is off.
PIU
FAN
On (green) On (red)
FAN
On (yellow) Off
CRIT/MAJ/MIN
On (red) On (yellow) Off
FAN
INPUT
On (green)
APIU
On (red)
OUTPUT
On (green)
APIU
On (red)
ALM
On (red)
Rectifier module of UPM
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
156
Indicator Vout
State On (green)
Meaning The output of the rectifier module is normal. The entire power system is normal. The entire power system is faulty. In normal situations, the indicator is off.
Applicable Board
RUN ALM
Flashing (green) On (red)
Monitoring module of UPM
10.10 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 550 has passed many safety certifications. Table 10-36 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has passed. Table 10-36 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has passed Item Electromagnetic compatibility Standard

CE certification ETSI EN 301 489-1 ETSI EN 301 489-4 CISPR 22 EN 55022 ITU-T K.27 ETSI EN 300 253 CE certification ETSI EN 60215 ETSI EN 60950 IEC 60825 GB 4943 RoHS REACH
Surge protection
Safety
Environmental protection
10.11 Environmental Specifications

The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environments for storage, transportation, and operation.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
157
10.11.1 Storage Environment

This section provides the requirements on the storage environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate
Table 10-37 lists climate requirements. Table 10-37 Climate requirements Item Altitude Atmospheric pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Wind speed Specification 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa -40C to +70C 1C/min 5% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirements
Requirements for storing equipment on site: Generally, the equipment must be stored indoors. No water should remain on the floor or leak into equipment crates. The equipment should be placed away from areas where water leakage is possible (for example, do not place near automatic fire-fighting extinguishing and heating systems). Ensure that all the following four conditions are met if the equipment is stored outdoors:

Crates are intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken to prevent water from entering crates. No water is on the ground where crates are placed and water is not seeped into crates. Crates are not exposed to direct sunlight.
Biological Environment

Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness

The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust. Table 10-38 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
158
Table 10-38 Density requirements for mechanically active substances Mechanically Active Substance Suspended dust Precipitable dust Sand particles Content 5.00 mg/m3 20.0 mg/mh 300 mg/m3
Table 10-39 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
Table 10-39 Density requirements for chemically active substances Chemically Active Substance SO2 H 2S NO2 NH3 CL2 HCL HF O3 Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 10-40 lists requirements for mechanical stress. Table 10-40 Requirements for mechanical stress Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub-item Displacement Acceleration Frequency range Static load Static pressure Specification 1.5 mm 5 m/s2 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz
Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
NOTE Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
159
10.11.2 Transportation Environment

This section provides the requirements on the transportation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate
Table 10-41 lists climate requirements. Table 10-41 Climate requirements Item Altitude Atmospheric pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Wind speed Specification 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa -40C to +70C 1C/min 5% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirement
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:

Crates are intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken for vehicles to prevent water from entering crates. No water is present in vehicles.
Biological Environment

Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness

The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive dust. Table 10-42 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances.
Table 10-42 Density requirements for mechanically active substances Mechanically Active Substance Suspended dust Content No requirement
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
160
Mechanically Active Substance Precipitable dust Sand particles
Content 3.0 mg/m2h 100 mg/m3
Table 10-43 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
Table 10-43 Density requirements for chemically active substances Chemically Active Substance SO2 H 2S NOx NH3 CL2 HCL HF O3 Content 1.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 3.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 0.03 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 10-44 lists requirements for mechanical stress. Table 10-44 Requirements for mechanical stress Item Random vibration Sub-item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Shock Shock response spectrum I (weight of sample > 50 kg) Shock response spectrum II (weight of sample 50 kg) Drop Weight (kg) < 10 < 15 Specification 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz -3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times for each panel
180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times for each panel
Height (m) 1.0 1.0
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
161
Item
Sub-item < 20 < 30 < 40 < 50 < 100 > 100
Specification 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.1 Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
Static load
Static pressure
NOTE A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input. Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
10.11.3 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed in a Cabinet)

This section provides the requirements on the operating environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate
Table 10-45 and Table 10-46 list climate requirements. Table 10-45 Requirements for temperature and humidity Operating Temperature Long-term operating temperature: -5C to +55C Extreme operating temperature: -5C to +65C Relative Humidity 5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of a chassis. Extreme operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours every day and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.
Table 10-46 Other climate requirements Item Altitude Specification 4000 m
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
162
Item Atmospheric pressure Temperature change rate Solar radiation Heat radiation Wind speed
Specification 70 kPa to 106 kPa 30C/h 700 W/s 600 W/s 5 m/s
Water Resistance and Dust Resistance
If a cabinet is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain, the cabinet must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The first numeral "3" indicates that the cabinet can prevent a solid object with a diameter equal to or greater than 2.5 mm from entering the cabinet. The second numeral "1" indicates that vertically falling drops shall have no harmful effects.) Ensure that there is no mouse in an equipment room, preventing mouse urine from entering a cabinet.
Corrosion Protection
Sites must meet the following anti-corrosion requirements:
Sites must be kept away from pollution sources. If pollution sources cannot be avoided, sites must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources, or cabinets providing sufficient protection must be used.
For sources of heavy pollution such as metal smelting plants and coal mines, keep a minimum distance of 5 km. For sources of medium pollution such as chemical factories, rubber factories, electroplating factories, agricultural fertilizer factories, paper mills, and power plants, keep a minimum distance of 3.7 km. For sources of light pollution such as food factories, leather factories, daily necessities factories, and livestock farms, keep a minimum distance of 2 km.
Equipment rooms must be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lakes, and must be kept away from roads or sand fields with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be met, cabinets providing sufficient protection must be used. Equipment rooms must be isolated from sewer outlets, sewage treatment tanks, and industrial/heating boilers, to prevent corrosive gases from eroding components and circuit boards. Do not install network boxes in underground garages or other garages. If a network box can be installed only in a garage, install it at a well-ventilated place and avoid car exhausts, or select a network box providing sufficient protection. Power on equipment within seven days after it is installed in a cabinet.
Table 10-47 shows the content limits on corrosive gases.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
163
Table 10-47 Content limits on corrosive gases Item SO2 H 2S NH3 Cl2 Content 1.50 mg/m 0.03 mg/m 0.150 mg/m 0.30 mg/m
The requirements for relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents are provided as follows:
The relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents must be below 80%. If the relative humidity exceeds 80%, the anti-corrosion measures that the equipment provides can only decrease but not eliminate corrosion risks.
If the humidity control measures that equipment rooms provide cannot keep the relative humidity in the equipment rooms below 80%, adopt appropriate measures listed in Table 10-48. Table 10-48 Measures for maintaining the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents below 80% Heat Dissipati on Method That Equipme nt Uses Natural dissipatio n Natural dissipatio n Heat Dissipat ion Method That Cabinet s Use Natural dissipatio n Fan cooling Suggestion Remarks
None
None
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face cabinets' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment. Air conditioners and fans must not blow directly towards equipment, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
None
Natural dissipatio n Fan cooling
Using open racks Natural dissipatio n
None
Keep a distance greater than 150 mm between equipment's air intake vents and cabinets' air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering equipment. Ensure that cabinets have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering cabinets.
None
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
164
Heat Dissipati on Method That Equipme nt Uses Fan cooling
Heat Dissipat ion Method That Cabinet s Use Fan cooling
Suggestion
Remarks
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face cabinets' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment. Ensure that cabinets have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering cabinets. Cabinets must use temperature-controlled fans, to prevent damp/cold air from entering cabinets. To be specific, fans start at high temperature and stop at low temperature. It is recommended that fans start when the temperature at cabinets' air outlets exceeds 40C and stop when the temperature is lower than 35C. The humidity control measures that equipment rooms provide must ensure that the relative humidity in the equipment rooms is below 80%; otherwise, corrosion risks cannot be avoided. Air conditioners must not blow cold air directly towards equipment, to prevent the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents from increasing. If equipment rooms use air conditioners to decrease temperature, close doors immediately after your entrance, to prevent damp air from condensing.
When the ambient temperature exceeds 30C, the relative humidity is below 80% in most areas. In addition, the temperature at cabinets' air outlets is higher than the ambient temperature. Therefore, it is recommended that fans stop when the temperature at cabinets' air outlets is lower than 35C. None
Fan cooling
Using open racks
Mechanical Stress
Table 10-49 lists requirements for mechanical stress. Table 10-49 Requirements for mechanical stress Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub-item Velocity Specification 5 mm/s -
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
165
Item
Sub-item Acceleration Frequency range
Specification 5 Hz to 62 Hz 2 m/s 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock
Shock response spectrum II
Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s, 11 ms, 3 in each direction
NOTE A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input.
10.11.4 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed on a Wall)

This section provides the requirements on the operating environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate
Table 10-50 and Table 10-51 list climate requirements. Table 10-50 Requirements for temperature and humidity Operating Temperature Long-term operating temperature: -5C to +55C Extreme operating temperature: -5C to +65C Relative Humidity 5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of a chassis. Extreme operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.
Table 10-51 Other climate requirements Item Altitude Atmospheric pressure Temperature change rate Solar radiation Heat radiation Wind speed Specification 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 30C/h 700 W/s 600 W/s 5 m/s
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
166
Water Resistance

Water resistance requirements for network boxes are provided as follows:
If a network box is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain, the network box must meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The first numeral "3" indicates that the network box can prevent a solid object with a diameter equal to or greater than 2.5 mm from entering the network box. The second numeral "1" indicates that vertically falling drops shall have no harmful effects.) If a network box is installed in a corridor that is exposed to rain, the network box must meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection. ("IP" indicates international protection rating. The first numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing solid objects from entering network boxes. That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of equipment or to impair safety. The second numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing water from entering network boxes. That is, water projected in jets against the enclosure from any direction shall have no harmful effects.)
Requirements for installing network boxes are provided as follows:
Equipment must be installed in a position away from water drips (outdoor units and water pipes of air conditioners, sewer pipes, or windows). Equipment must be installed in a position not exposed to rain. Equipment must not be installed in light-current wells or directly on the corridor ground on the first floor. Equipment must not be mounted on a wall that is near to windows. Route cables/fibers into network boxes only from the bottom sides. In addition, waterproof the connection between cables/fibers and network boxes, to prevent rain from entering network boxes along cables/fibers.
Dust Resistance
For dusty areas, network boxes with air filters are recommended (to improve equipment reliability) and the network boxes must meet the requirements of IP51 rating protection. (The first numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing solid objects from entering network boxes. That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of equipment or to impair safety.)
For network boxes with air filters, clear the air filters periodically.
Corrosion Protection
Sites must meet the following anti-corrosion requirements:
Sites must be kept away from pollution sources. If pollution sources cannot be avoided, sites must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources, or network boxes providing sufficient protection must be used.
For sources of heavy pollution such as metal smelting plants and coal mines, keep a minimum distance of 5 km. For sources of medium pollution such as chemical factories, rubber factories, electroplating factories, agricultural fertilizer factories, paper mills, and power plants, keep a minimum distance of 3.7 km. For sources of light pollution such as food factories, leather factories, daily necessities factories, and livestock farms, keep a minimum distance of 2 km.
Installation sites must be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lakes, and must be kept away from roads or sand fields with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be met, network boxes providing sufficient protection must be used.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
167
Installation sites must be isolated from sewer outlets, sewage treatment tanks, and industrial/heating boilers, to prevent corrosive gases from eroding components and circuit boards. Do not install network boxes in underground garages or other garages. If a network box can be installed only in a garage, install it at a well-ventilated place and avoid car exhausts, or select a network box providing sufficient protection. Power on equipment within seven days after it is installed in a network box.
Table 10-52 shows the content limits on corrosive gases. Table 10-52 Content limits on corrosive gases Item SO2 H 2S NH3 Cl2 Content 1.50 mg/m 0.03 mg/m 0.15 mg/m 0.30 mg/m
The requirements for relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents are provided as follows:
The relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents must be below 80%. If the relative humidity exceeds 80%, the anti-corrosion measures that the equipment provides can only decrease but not eliminate corrosion risks.
If the humidity control measures that network boxes provide cannot keep the relative humidity in the network boxes below 80%, adopt appropriate measures listed in Table 10-53. Table 10-53 Measures for maintaining the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents below 80% Heat Dissipati on Method That Equipme nt Uses Natural dissipatio n Natural dissipatio n Heat Dissipat ion Method That Networ k Boxes Use Natural dissipatio n Fan cooling Suggestion Remarks
None
None
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face network boxes' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
None
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
168
Heat Dissipati on Method That Equipme nt Uses Fan cooling
Heat Dissipat ion Method That Networ k Boxes Use Natural dissipatio n
Suggestion
Remarks
Keep a distance greater than 150 mm between equipment's air intake vents and network boxes' air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering equipment. Ensure that network boxes have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering the network boxes. Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face network boxes' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment. Ensure that network boxes have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering the network boxes. Network boxes must use temperature-controlled fans, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the network boxes. To be specific, fans start at high temperature and stop at low temperature. It is recommended that fans start when the temperature at network boxes' air outlets exceeds 40C and stop when the temperature is lower than 35C.
None
Fan cooling
Fan cooling
When the ambient temperature exceeds 30C, the relative humidity is below 80% in most areas. In addition, the temperature at network boxes' air outlets is higher than the ambient temperature. Therefore, it is recommended that fans stop when the temperature at network boxes' air outlets is lower than 35C.
Mechanical Stress
Table 10-54 lists requirements for mechanical stress. Table 10-54 Requirements for mechanical stress Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub-item Velocity Acceleration Frequency range Specification 5 mm/s 5 Hz to 62 Hz 2 m/s 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
169
Item Shock
Sub-item Shock response spectrum II
Specification Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s, 11 ms, 3 in each direction
NOTE A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
170
11 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
11
Energy Saving

Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
The OptiX 550 complies with RoHS directive (2002/95/EC), WEEE directive (2002/96/EC) and REACH (REGULATION (EC) No 1907/2006).
The OptiX OSN 550 adopts a variety of technologies to reduce equipment energy. Uses an easy scheme for board design. Replaces ordinary chips with ASIC chips that require low power consumption. Uses highly efficient power modules.
Environmental Protection
The equipment is designed according to the requirements of environmental protection. The equipment complies with RoHS/REACH directive.
The equipment is amply packaged while materials as conserved. The size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment. The product is also designed for easy unpacking. All hazardous substances contained in the packaging decompose easily. Every plastic component that weighs over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling. Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by using simple tools. All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain types of identifying information, such as silkscreens, are printed on front panels or subracks.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
171
12 Standard Compliance
12
About This Chapter
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations 12.2 IETF Standards 12.3 IEEE Standards
Standard Compliance
This section lists the standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
This section lists the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
This section lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
This section lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. 12.4 Environment Related Standards This section lists the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. 12.5 MEF Standards This section lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. 12.6 Safety Standards This section lists the safety standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. 12.7 EMC Standards This section lists the EMC Standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. 12.8 Protection Standards This section lists the protection standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations

This section lists the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
172
Table 12-1 ITU-T Recommendations Recommendatio n ITU-T G.664 ITU-T G.702 ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.704 ITU-T G.706 ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.773 ITU-T G.774 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.7 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.775 Description Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44,736 kbit/s hierarchical levels Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) performance monitoring for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of the payload structure for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of multiplex-section protection for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of the sub-network connection protection for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of connection supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) unidirectional performance monitoring for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of lower order path trace and interface labeling for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH signals Common equipment management function requirements Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
173
Recommendatio n
Description networks and equipment
ITU-T G.781 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.784 ITU-T G.803 ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.810 ITU-T G.811 ITU-T G.812 ITU-T G.813 ITU-T G.821
Synchronization layer functions Types and Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Generic functional architecture of transport networks Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology and generic functionality Generic protection switching - Linear trail and sub-network protection Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate synchronous digital paths Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Transport of SDH elements on PDH networks - Frame and multiplexing structures
ITU-T G.822 ITU-T G.823 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.826 ITU-T G.828 ITU-T G.829 ITU-T G.831 ITU-T G.832
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
174
Recommendatio n ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.842 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.958 ITU-T G.7043/Y.1343 ITU-T G.8010 ITU-T G.8011 ITU-T G.8011.1 ITU-T G.8011.2 ITU-T G.8012 ITU-T G.8021 ITU-T G.8110 ITU-T G.8110.1 ITU-T G.8121 ITU-T G.8112 ITU-T G.8131 ITU-T G.8261 ITU-T G.8262 ITU-T G.8264 ITU-T Y.1541 ITU-T Y.1710 ITU-T Y.1730 ITU-T Y.1711 ITU-T Y.1720 ITU-T I.610 ITU-T Y.1291
Description Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Inter-working of SDH network protection architectures Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables Virtual concatenation of plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) signals Architecture of Ethernet layer networks Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework Ethernet private line service Ethernet virtual private line service Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment functional blocks MPLS layer network architecture Application of MPLS/MPLS-TP in the transport network Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock (EEC) Timing distribution through packet networks Network performance objectives for IP-based services Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and Ethernet services Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks Protection switching for MPLS networks B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions An architectural framework for support of quality of service (QoS) in
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
175
Recommendatio n
Description packet networks
ITU-T G.652 ITU-T G.655 ITU-T G.671 ITU-T Y.1710 ITU-T Y.1731 ITU-T G.8032 ITU-T G.8113.1
Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks Ethernet ring protection switching Operations, administration and maintenance mechanism for MPLS-TP networks (G.tpoam)
12.2 IETF Standards

This section lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 12-2 IETF standards Standard RFC 2819 draft-ietf-l2vpn-oam-req-frmk05 RFC 4664 RFC 3031 RFC 3469 RFC 3811 RFC 3813 RFC 3814 Description Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base L2VPN OAM requirements and framework Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs) MPLS architecture Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery Definitions of textual conventions for multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) label switching router (LSR) management information base Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) forwarding equivalence class to next hop label forwarding entry (FEC-To-NHLFE) management information base A differentiated service two-rate, three-color marker with efficient handling of in-profile traffic
RFC 4115
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
176
Standard RFC 4221 RFC 4377 RFC 4378 RFC 3032 RFC 3443 RFC 3916 RFC 3985 RFC 4197
Description Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol label switched (MPLS) networks A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and management (OAM) MPLS label stack encoding Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) networks Requirements for pseudo-wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) architecture Requirements for edge-to-edge emulation of time division multiplexed (TDM) circuits over packet switching networks Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3) Ethernet address resolution protocol Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated services Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks Structure-agnostic time division multiplexing (TDM) over packet (SAToP) Pseudo wire virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN) Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) over MPLS Networks Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Transparent Cell Transport Service Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation
RFC 4385 RFC 4446 RFC 0826 RFC 3270 RFC 4448 RFC 4553 RFC 5085 RFC 5086
RFC 4717 RFC 4816
RFC 4385 RFC 5254
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
177
Standard
Description Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
draft-ietf-pwe3-segmented-pw03 draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-pw-require ments-03 draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-pw-arch-02 RFC 3644 RFC 2212 RFC 2474 RFC 2475 RFC 2597 RFC 2698 RFC 3246 RFC 3270 RFC 5586 RFC 5654 RFC 5921 RFC 5860 RFC 1990 RFC 5317 draft-ietf-mpls-tp-oam-analysis STD 0062
Segmented pseudo wire Requirements for inter domain pseudo-wires An architecture for multi-segment pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model Specification of guaranteed quality of service Definition of the differentiated services field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 headers An architecture for differentiated services Assured forwarding PHB group A two rate three color marker An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior) Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated services MPLS generic associated channel Requirements of an MPLS transport profile A framework for MPLS in transport networks Requirements for operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) in MPLS transport networks The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP) Joint Working Team (JWT) Report on MPLS Architectural Considerations for a Transport Profile An Overview of the OAM Tool Set for MPLS based Transport Networks An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Frameworks
12.3 IEEE Standards

This section lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
178
Table 12-3 IEEE standards Standard IEEE 802.1D IEEE 802.1Q IEEE 802.1ad IEEE 802.3ah Description Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider Bridges Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Amendment: Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers, and Management Parameters for Subscriber Access Networks Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks - Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications Type 100BASE-T MAC parameters, Physical Layer, MAUs, and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation Full Duplex Operation and Type 100BASE-T2 Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree Aggregation of multiple link segments Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation Link Layer Discovery Protocol
IEEE 802.1ag IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3x IEEE 802.1w IEEE 802.3ad IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.1ab
12.4 Environment Related Standards

This section lists the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 12-4 Environment related standards Standard CISPR 22 EN 60950-1 UL 1950-1 IEC 60825-1 Description Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1: General requirements Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1: General requirements Safety of laser products-Part 1: Equipment classification, requirements
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
179
Standard
Description and user's guide
IEC 60825-2 IEC 60950-1 IEC 61000-4-2
Safety of laser products-Part 2: Safety of optical fiber communication systems (OFCS) Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1: General requirements Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 2: Testing and measurement techniques Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test Basic EMC Publication Electromagnetic compatibility; Part 3: Testing and measurement techniques Section 3 radio frequency electromagnetic fields; immunity test. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Basic EMC publication Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 5: Testing and measurement techniques Section 5: Surge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility: Part 6: Testing and measurement techniques: Section 6 conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency fields; immunity test Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment Equipment Engineering (EE); Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment Safety of laser products Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1: Storage Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations Partly temperature-controlled location Equipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunications standard for equipment practice
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6
ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 ETS 300 753 IEC 60825 IEC 60297 IEC 60068-2 IEC 60068-3-3 IEC 60721-2-6 IEC 60721-3-1
IEC 60721-3-3
ETS 300 019-1-1 ETS 300 019-1-3 ETS 300 119
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
180
Standard ETS 300 417 EN 300 132
Description Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment Equipment Engineering (EE); Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications equipment
12.5 MEF Standards

This section lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 12-5 MEF standards Standard MEF 2 MEF 4 MEF 9 MEF 10 MEF 14 Description Requirements and framework for Ethernet service protection in metro Ethernet networks Metro Ethernet network architecture framework - Part 1: generic framework Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI Ethernet services attributes phase 1 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1
12.6 Safety Standards

This section lists the safety standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 12-6 Safety standards Safety Standard EN 60950-1 IEC 60950-1 IEC 60825-1 IEC 60825-2 EN 60950 IEC 60950 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94 Description Safety of information technology equipment Safety of information technology equipment Safety of laser equipment Safety of laser equipment - requirement of OFCS Information technology equipment - safety Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
181
Safety Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 950-95 73/23/EEC UL60950-1 IEC 60529 GR-1089-CORE EG 201 212 ITU-T G.644
Description Safety of information technology equipment 2006/95/EC Safety of information technology equipment Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Electrical safety; Classification of interfaces for equipment to be connected to telecommunication networks Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems
12.7 EMC Standards

This section lists the EMC Standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 12-7 EMC related standards Standard IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-29 EN 61000-4-29 CISPR 22/EN 55022 CISPR 24/EN 55024 Description Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques-Surge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement Information technology equipment-immunity characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
182
Standard ETSI EN 300386
Description Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Additional ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Radiated emission testing of physically large telecommunication systems Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
ETSI EN 201468
ETSI EN 300127
ETSI EN 300132-2
12.8 Protection Standards

This section lists the protection standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with. Table 12-8 Protection related standards Standard IEC 61024-1 IEC 61312-1 IEC 61000-4-5 ITU-T K.11 ITU-T K.20 ITU-T K.27 ITU-T K.41 Description Protection of structures against lightning Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general principles Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 5: Surge immunity test Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltages and overcurrents Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication building Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centers to surge overvoltages
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
183
A Glossary
A
Numerics 1+1 backup 1:N protection 3G 3R 3rd Generation (3G) See 3rd Generation. reshaping, retiming, regenerating
Glossary
A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active component goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active component to ensure that the system service is not interrupted. An architecture that has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails, and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
A A/D AAA AAL AAL2 AAL5 ABR ACAP ACH ACL ACL rule ADM analog/digit See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting. See ATM Adaptation Layer. ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5 See available bit rate. See adjacent channel alternate polarization. associated channel header See access control list. A rule for controlling the access of users. add/drop multiplexer
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
184
A Glossary
AF AGC AIO AIS AIS insertion
See assured forwarding. automatic gain control asynchronous input/output alarm indication signal Insertion of AIS in a channel with excessive errors to indicate that it is unavailable. For a line board, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For tributary board at the E1/T1 level, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For tributary board at the E3 level or higher, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B3 byte. See automatic laser shutdown. See adaptive modulation. See alternate mark inversion. See American National Standards Institute. See avalanche photodiode. access point identifier automatic protection switching A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working facility and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol. Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS switchover event is detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the protection facility. See Address Resolution Protocol. See autonomous system. American Standard Code for Information Interchange amplitude shift keying asynchronous transfer mode An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of information, including voice, video, and data. Logically bound ATM VP network/subnetwork connections that share the same physical transmission channel. In the VP Group (VPG), a pair of VP connections (working connection and its protective connection) is used for monitoring the automatic protection switching, called monitoring connections (APS VPCs). If the monitoring connections switch over, the whole VPG will switch over to quicken the ATM protection switching (as quick as the protection switching of the SDH layer). See automatic transmit power control. See administrative unit. See administrative unit group.
ALS AM AMI ANSI APD APID APS APS 1+1 protection
ARP AS ASCII ASK ATM ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) ATM protection group
ATPC AU AUG
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
185
A Glossary
AWG Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA)
arrayed waveguide grating An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry. ANSI participates in defining network protocol standards. A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the consumption of network services by users. A link between the customer and the telecommunication network. Many technologies, such as the copper wire, optical fiber, mobile, microwave and satellite, are used for access. A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. A layer that connects the end users (or last mile) to the ISP network. The access layer devices are cost-effective and have high-density interfaces. In an actual network, the access layer includes the devices and cables between the access points and the UPEs. Any entity that has station functionality and provides access to the distribution services, via the wireless medium (WM) for associated stations. The sum of the service usage, consumption, and recharge fees of a subscriber. A link in the link aggregation group, which is connected to the active interface. A working mode of EFM OAM. The discovery and remote loopback can only be initiated by the interface in the active mode. A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. A portion of the local routing information which pertains to the reachability of a single neighbor ES or IS over a single circuit. Adjacencies are used as input to the Decision Process for forming paths through the routing domain. A separate adjacency is created for each neighbor on a circuit, and for each level of routing (i.e. level 1 and level 2) on a broadcast circuit. A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals. A situation where the virtual containers (VC) to carry concatenated services in SDH are consecutive in terms of their service in the frame structures, so that they use the same path overhead (POH). The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload
access
access control list (ACL) access layer
access point accumulation active link active mode adaptive modulation (AM)
adjacency
adjacent channel alternate polarization (ACAP) adjacent concatenation
administrative unit (AU)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
186
A Glossary
(the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. administrative unit group (AUG) advanced ACL One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s. An ACL that defines ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses, protocol type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, and message codes. Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes. The time to live before an object becomes invalid. The interface between the cellular phone set or wireless modem (usually portable or mobile) and the active base station. A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared. A device that reflects the status of an alarm in visual-audio mode. The alarm box notifies you of the alarm generation and alarm severity after it is connected to the Signaling Network Manager server or client and the related parameters are set. The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. A process to analyze correlated alarms. For example, if alarm 2 is generated within five seconds after alarm 1 is generated, and it complies with the conditions defined in the alarm correlation analysis rule, you can either mask the alarm or raise the level of alarm 2 according to the behavior defined in the alarm correlation rule. An alarm management method. Alarms are detected and reported to the NMS system, and whether the alarm information is displayed and saved is decided by the alarm filtering status. An alarm with the filtering status set to "Filter" is not displayed and saved on the NMS, but is monitored on the NE. A function that indicates the alarm status of an NE. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current alarm status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. A mode for an NE that indicates whether the port is automatically restored to the normal status after the service is accessed or the fault is removed. There are three alarm inversion modes: normal, revertible and non-revertible. When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarms to the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated by users. An alarm management method. Alarms that are set to be suppressed are not reported from NEs any more. A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent
aggregated link aging time air interface alarm
alarm box
alarm cascading alarm correlation analysis
alarm filtering
alarm indication
alarm inversion mode
alarm notification
alarm suppression alternate mark inversion
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
187
A Glossary
(AMI) analog signal
logical 1 values. A signal in which information is represented with a continuously variable physical quantity, such as voltage. Because of this constant changing of the wave shape with regard to its passing a given point in time or space, an analog signal might have a virtually indefinite number of states or values. This contrasts with a digital signal that is expressed as a square wave and therefore has a very limited number of discrete states. Analog signals, with complicated structures and narrow bandwidth, are vulnerable to external interference. One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. An attempt to bypass security controls in a system with the mission of using that system or compromising it. An attack is usually accomplished by exploiting a current vulnerability. Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels. A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas. A capability of providing services at any time. The probability of this capability is called availability. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay. A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics. A performance indicator indicating the average RTT of multiple ping operations or other probe operations. It is expressed in milliseconds.
assured forwarding (AF)
attack
attenuation attenuator automatic laser shutdown (ALS) automatic transmit power control (ATPC) autonomous system (AS)
availability available bit rate (ABR)
avalanche photodiode (APD)
average delay
B B-ISDN BA See broadband integrated services digital network. booster amplifier
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
188
A Glossary
BBE BC BCD BDI BDI packet
background block error boundary clock binary coded decimal See backward defect indication. A packet used to notify the upstream LSR of the failure event which has occurred on the downstream LSR through the reverse LSP. The BDI packet can be used in the 1:1/N protective switchover service. See best effort. bit error rate See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection. Border Gateway Protocol See bit interleaved parity. See bit interleaved parity-8. bit interleaved parity-X See building integrated timing supply. best master clock See bayonet-neill-concelman. See bridge protocol data unit. board protection switching See base station controller. base station subsystem base transceiver station backbone wavelength division multiplexing system A simple Hello protocol, similar to the adjacent detection in the route protocol. Two systems periodically send BFD detection messages on the channel between the two systems. If one system does not receive the detection message from the other system for a long time, you can infer that the channel is faulty. Under some conditions, the TX and RX rates between systems need to be negotiated to reduce traffic load. A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment, or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the networks connected to it. An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged. A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the
BE BER BFD BGP BIP BIP-8 BIP-X BITS BMC BNC BPDU BPS BSC BSS BTS BWS Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)
backbone network
backplane backup
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
189
A Glossary
purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards. backward defect indication (BDI) bandwidth A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. An area of radio coverage consisting of cells served by one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) in the same base station site. A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network. A form of modulation in which the information is applied directly onto the physical transmission medium. A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables. An information transmission path with defined capacity, delay and bit error rate. A network used to carry the messages of a transport-layer protocol between physical devices. A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability. A unitary and simple service model. Without being approved, but after notifying the network, the application can send any number of packets at any time. The network tries its best to send the packets, but delay and reliability cannot be ensured. Best-Effort is the default service model of the Internet. It can be applied to various networks, such as FTP and E-Mail. It is implemented through the First In First-Out (FIFO) queue. An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by equipment at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits
base station area base station controller (BSC)
baseband bayonet-neill-concelman (BNC) bearer bearer network best effort (BE)
best-effort service
bit error bit interleaved parity (BIP)
bit interleaved parity-8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
(BIP-8)
(one byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0. A method of filtering packets based on their source IP addresses. Compared with ACL, the match condition for the black list is much simpler. Therefore, the black list can filter packets at a higher speed and can effectively screen the packet sent from the specific IP address. A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data throughput capacity. A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses. The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels simultaneously. A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice. It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. A network address in computer networking that allows information to be sent to all nodes on a network, rather than to a specific network host. A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame. In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS. A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly. A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast sending.
blacklist
bound path bridge
bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)
bridging broadband integrated services digital network (B-ISDN) broadcast broadcast address broadcast domain
building integrated timing supply (BITS)
built-in WDM
burst
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
191
A Glossary
C CAC CAR CAS multiframe See connection admission control. committed access rate A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1 PCM frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits are used for multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal (MFAS) for synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not multiframe alignment signal (NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15 frames, timeslot 16 is used to transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M) signaling corresponding to each timeslot. See constant bit rate. See committed burst size. See continuity check. See co-channel dual polarization. See Common Channel Signaling. cell delay variation tolerance See customer edge. See circuit emulation service. connectivity fault management cell fill rate committed information rate See Common and Internal Spanning Tree. common language equipment identification clock card connectionless network protocol See cell loss priority. coded mark inversion central office See central processing unit. connection request See cyclic redundancy check. A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of timeslot 0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in principle and implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM frames. Each CRC-4 multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits. Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can check the previous check block.
CBR CBS CC CCDP CCS CDVT CE CES CFM CFR CIR CIST CLEI CLK CLNP CLP CMI CO CPU CR CRC CRC-4 multiframe
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
192
A Glossary
CSA CSES CSF CSMA/CD CST CTC CV CV packet
Canadian Standards Association consecutive severely errored second Client Signal Fail See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection. See common spanning tree. common transmit clock connectivity verification A type of packet that is generated at the frequency of 1/s on the source end LSR of an LSP, and is terminated on the destination end LSR of the LSP. A CV packet is transmitted from the source end LSR to the destination LSR along the LSP. A CV packet contains the unique identifier (TTSI) of the LSP so that all types of abnormalities on the path can be detected. control word See coarse wavelength division multiplexing. A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information from user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling information for all other channels in the system. The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected. The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide. Free-standing and self-supporting enclosure for housing electrical and/or electronic equipment. It is usually fitted with doors and/or side panels which may or may not be removable. A component, which is used to arrange cables in order. A tape used to bind cables. Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer networking access method in which:

CW CWDM Common Channel Signaling (CCS) Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) cabinet
cable distribution plate cable tie carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
A carrier sensing scheme is used. A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame, stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP)
A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be dropped. The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus.
central processing unit (CPU)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
193
A Glossary
centralized alarm channel
The alarms of all the hosts connecting to the Operation and Maintenance Unit (OMU). A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. Channels can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s, kb/s, Mb/s, Gb/s, and Tb/s. The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device. A set of rules for checking and analyzing device echo information. The check criteria for an alarm collection item need to be set through the configuration file. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. An algorithm used for selecting the best clock for clock synchronization. For different peers (multiple servers or peers configured for a client), a peer sends clock synchronization packets to each server or passive peer. After receiving the response packets, it uses the clock selection algorithm to select the best clock. A device that provides standard time for the NTP configuration. Also called frequency synchronization. The signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point does not need to be consistent. The method to keep the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in a network. A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization has twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking. A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the same time. Their interference makes both unintelligible. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP. An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.
channel spacing check criteria circuit emulation service (CES)
clock selection
clock source clock synchronization clock tracing co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
collision committed burst size (CBS)
common spanning tree (CST) composite service
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
194
A Glossary
conference congestion congestion management
An IP multimedia session that have two or more participants. Each conference has a focus and can be identified uniquely. An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic that results in a decrease in network service efficiency. A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. When the network congestion occurs, it places packets into the queue for buffer and determines the packet forwarding order. An association of transmission channels or telecommunication circuits, switching and other functional units set up to provide for the transfer of signals between two or more network points, to support a single communication. A control process in which the network takes actions in the call set-up phase (or call re-negotiation phase) to determine which connection request is admitted. A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. Pertaining to a method of data presentation. The data has a complete destination address and is delivered by the network on a best-effort basis, independent of other data being exchanged between the same pair of users. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. A set of hardware or software devices. In software domain, it refers to the environment variables and processes. In hardware domain, it refers to a type of topology node that contains nodes, usually refers to one device with multiple frames; each node stands for a frame. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved after MEPs transmit Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) periodically. A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets. The channel used to transmit digital control information from the base station to a cell phone or vice-versa. A "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. The convergence layer provides the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performance, fewer interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs. The system that controls or influences climate by decreasing the air temperature only. A layer that functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks and provides high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmission structure that provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layer devices must have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability,
connection
connection admission control (CAC) connection point
connectionless
constant bit rate (CBR)
container
continuity check (CC) control VLAN control channel convergence layer
cooling system core layer
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
adaptability, and they support dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network, the core layer includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbone routers. correlation corruption The similarities when two random processes vary with time. The alteration of the information in IMS networks for the purpose of deception. For example, attackers corrupt the correct charging information to evade being charged. The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections of NEs. A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa. An oscillator that produces electrical oscillations at a frequency determined by the physical characteristics of a piezoelectric quartz crystal. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. To migrate the data of an application system to another application system, which then provides services. A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
cross-connection
crossover cable
crystal oscillator customer edge (CE) cutover cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
D D/A DB DC DC-C DC-I DC-return common (with ground) (DC-C) digital-analog converter database direct current See DC-return common (with ground). See DC-return isolate (with ground). A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with ground) (DC-I)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
196
A Glossary
DCC DCE DCF DCM DCN DDF DDN DHCP DLAG DM DNI DRDB DS interior node DS node DSCP DSL DSLAM DSP DTE DTR DVB DVB-ASI DVMRP DWDM Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) data backup data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
See data communications channel. See data circuit-terminating equipment. data communication function See dispersion compensation module. See data communication network. digital distribution frame See digital data network. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. See distributed link aggregation group. See delay measurement. dual node interconnection dynamic random database A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. differentiated services code point See digital subscriber line. See digital subscriber line access multiplexer. digital signal processing See data terminal equipment. data terminal ready digital video broadcasting digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. See dense wavelength division multiplexing. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts. A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss in the case of damage or failure in the original storage area. The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE may be separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
197
A Glossary
equipment. The DCE may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end of the line. data communication network (DCN) data communications channel (DCC) A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data communication function. The data channel that uses the D1D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information about operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1D3 are referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channels that are composed of bytes D4D12 are referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. A process that involves processing the data extracted from the source system, such as filtering, integration, calculation, and summary, finding and solving data inconsistency, and deleting invalid data so that the processed data meets the requirements of the destination system for the input data. An algorithm that is used to convert the data between heterogeneous data models. A method for retrieving data that is lost due to damage or misoperations. A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE. A kind of protocol data unit (PDU) which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP), such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function. The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node. In communications, the means by which a modem converts data from modulated carrier frequencies (waves that have been modified in such a way that variations in amplitude and frequency represent meaningful information) over a telephone line. Data is converted to the digital form needed by a computer to which the modem is attached, with as little distortion as possible. The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber. A port defined in the STP protocol. On each switch that runs the STP protocol, the traffic from the root bridge is forwarded to the designated port. The subnet connected to the STP switch receives the data traffic from the root bridge. All the ports on the root bridge are designated ports. On each subnet, there is only one designated port. When a network topology is stable, only the root port and the designated port forward traffic. Other non-designated ports are in the blocking state, and they receive STP packets, but does not forward user traffic. A process during which the information and resources in a network are changed unexpectedly and the meanings of the information and resources are deleted or changed.
data flow
data mapping data restoration data terminal equipment (DTE) datagram defect delay measurement (DM)
demodulation
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
designated port
destruction
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
198
A Glossary
digital data network (DDN) digital modulation
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A method that controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. A telecommunication network where information is first converted into distinct electronic pulses and then transmitted to a digital bit stream. A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states number of discrete states (for example, high and low voltages) rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by external interference. A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without affecting the POTS service. A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques. The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths are transmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of the medium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs. A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of transmitting fiber. A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port or a hardware failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports. A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled. A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a dot "." with each part is in the decimal numeral. To obtain data from an upper-layer device or the server. In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the link. A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (for example, "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure. An antenna intended to simultaneously radiate or receive two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized.
digital network digital signal
digital subscriber line (DSL) digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM) dispersion
dispersion compensation module (DCM) distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) domain dotted decimal notation download downstream dual-ended switching
dual-polarized antenna
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
199
A Glossary
E E-Aggr E-LAN E-Line EA EBS ECC EDFA EEPROM EF EFCI EFM EFM OAM EIA EIR EMC EMI EMS EPD EPL EPLAN ERPS ESC ESCON ESD ESN ETS ETSI EVC EVPL EVPLAN EXP See Ethernet aggregation. See Ethernet local area network. See Ethernet line. encryption algorithm See excess burst size. See embedded control channel. See erbium-doped fiber amplifier. See electrically erasable programable read-only memory. See expedited forwarding. explicit forward congestion indication Ethernet in the First Mile Ethernet in the first mile OAM See Electronic Industries Alliance. See excess information rate. See electromagnetic compatibility. See electromagnetic interference. element management system early packet discard See Ethernet private line. See Ethernet private LAN service. Ethernet ring protection switching See electric supervisory channel. See enterprise system connection. electrostatic discharge See equipment serial number. European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute. Ethernet virtual connection See Ethernet virtual private line. See Ethernet virtual private LAN service. See experimental bits.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
200
A Glossary
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) EoD Ethernet
An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various electronics manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232-C, for example, is the EIA standard for connecting serial components. See Ethernet over dual domains. A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to maintain. A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet service transmission across PSN and TDM networks. A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint connections. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections. A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections. A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Ethernet aggregation (E-Aggr) Ethernet line (E-Line) Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) Ethernet over dual domains (EoD) Ethernet private LAN service (EPLAN) Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private LAN service (EVPLAN) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) eSFP egress electric supervisory channel (ESC)
enhanced small form-factor pluggable The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled. A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals. A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out. A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment
electrically erasable programable read-only memory (EEPROM)
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
201
A Glossary
without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. electromagnetic interference (EMI) embedded control channel (ECC) emergency maintenance encapsulation Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. A type of measure taken to quickly rectify an emergency fault to recover the proper running of the related system or device and to reduce losses. A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP. A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment, or system that can be considered individually. A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint". An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range. The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presence of erroneous inputs. Anything that takes place on the managed object. For example, the managed object is added, deleted, or modified. A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
engineering label enterprise system connection (ESCON) entity equalization
equipment serial number (ESN) erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
error tolerance event excess burst size (EBS)
excess information rate (EIR)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
202
A Glossary
exercise switching expedited forwarding (EF)
An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The protection switching is not really performed. The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110". A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify the CoS of the MPLS packet. The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The physical ID of an NE is comprised of the NE ID and extended ID. The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals. The links between the current Web site and other Web sites. Generally, external links refer to links from other Web sites to the current Web site. To read the data required by the destination system from the source system.
experimental bits (EXP) extended ID
external cable
external links extract
F F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte. See fiber channel. flash database See frequency division duplex. See fiber distributed data interface. See forward defect indication. See forward defect indication packet. See frame delay variation. See fast Ethernet. See fast Ethernet port. See forward error correction. fast failure detection A path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service requirements. By default, the frequency is 20/s. An FFD packet contains information the same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same way for processing CV packets.
FC FDB FDD FDDI FDI FDI packet FDV FE FE port FEC FFD FFD packet
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
203
A Glossary
FICON FIFO FLR FPGA FPS FR FRU FTN FTP Fiber Connect (FICON)
See Fiber Connect. first in first out queuing See frame loss ratio. See field programmable gate array. See fast protection switching. See frame relay. field replaceable unit FEC to NHLFE File Transfer Protocol A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON. A feature in which for any link specified in a ring network, the source node is provided with certain bandwidth capacities if the data packets transmitted by the source node are constrained by the fairness algorithm. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended based on the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). The port that provides a rate of 100 Mbit/s. A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the working PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the sink receives the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the interworking function (IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services. A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources or intentional settings. A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure, or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher severity than event alarms. The process of determining that a fault has occurred. A process wherein a fault is notified. For example, when a fault occurs on the local interface, the local interface notifies the peer of the fault through OAMPDUs. The local interface then records the fault in the log, and reports it to the NMS. 1. A radio frequency transmission line interconnecting an antenna and a transmitter or receiver. 2. For an antenna comprising more than one driven element, a radio frequency transmission Line interconnecting the antenna input and a driven element.
fairness
fast Ethernet (FE)
fast Ethernet port (FE port) fast protection switching (FPS)
fault
fault alarm
fault detection fault notification
feeder
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
204
A Glossary
fiber channel (FC)
A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services. A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network. A trough that is used for routing fibers. General name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform the transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relationship between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network as much as possible to protect the network security. The bandwidth that is fully reserved and is allocated periodically in a GPON system to ensure the quality of cell transmission. If a T-CONT is provided with a fixed bandwidth and does not transmit cells, the OLT can still allocate/assign the fixed bandwidth. Therefore, idle cells are transmitted to the upstream OLT from the ONU/ONT. A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) and can be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data stored in flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off. A type of incident, such as insertion of a large volume of data, that results in denial of service. An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow. HQoS performs queue scheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user are classified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shaping percentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
fiber trough fiber/cable
field programmable gate array (FPGA)
firewall
fixed bandwidth
flash memory
flooding flow
flow queue
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
205
A Glossary
scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidth each; they can act at the same time without interfering each other. forward defect indication (FDI) A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms of the upper layer network where failure has occurred. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. A process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network node that does not support the original size of the packet. A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH connection. A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection. A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake of speed. An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference. An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length. A type of data transmission rate. The service bandwidth can be 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, or 2.4 kbit/s. A state that indicates that all slots of a piece of equipment are in use, that is, the equipment has no vacant slots. A safety device that protects an electric circuit from excessive current, consisting of or containing a metal element that melts when current exceeds a specific amperage, thereby opening the circuit.
forward defect indication packet (FDI packet) forward error correction (FEC) fragmentation frame delay variation (FDV) frame loss ratio (FLR)
frame relay (FR)
free-run mode
frequency division duplex (FDD)
full rate fully loaded fuse
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
206
A Glossary
G G-ACH GAL GCC GCRA GE GFC GFP GNE GPS GRE GSM GTS GUI Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) generic associated channel header generic associated channel header label general communication channel generic cell rate algorithm See gigabit Ethernet. generic flow control See Generic Framing Procedure. See gateway network element. See Global Positioning System. See Generic Routing Encapsulation. See Global System for Mobile Communications. See generic traffic shaping. graphical user interface A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently transmitting data packets. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS). The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB. A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to translate the data in the two network segments. A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer. A flow control that is applicable to the A interface, C/D interface, and trunks and can be achieved by integrating multiple function modules. It is adopted when the traffic is heavy, or location update and authentication of multiple subscribers are performed after the system restarts. It can efficiently prevent system breakdown caused by link congestion or CPU overload. A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic.
Global Positioning System (GPS) Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
gain
gateway gateway network element (GNE) general flow control
generic traffic shaping
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
207
A Glossary
(GTS) gigabit Ethernet (GE)
This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. A collection of technologies for transmitting Ethernet frames at a rate of a gigabit per second, as defined by the IEEE 802.3z standard. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A connection terminal on a communication device. It is used to connect the device with ground cables, maintaining a tight connection between the device and the grounding electrode.
ground terminal
H HCS HD-SDI HDB3 HDLC HDTV HEC HPA HPT HQoS HSDPA HSI High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) higher order connection supervision See high definition-serial digital interface signal. high density bipolar of order 3 code High-Level Data Link Control See high definition television. See header error control. high order path adaptation higher order path termination See hierarchical quality of service. See High Speed Downlink Packet Access. high-speed Internet A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. A call processing mode used by an attendant to end the conversation with a user. A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in the first four header bits and also at the receiving end. The commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. It contains information about the DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), known neighbors and timer values.
hang up hardware loopback header error control (HEC) hello packet
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
208
A Glossary
hierarchical quality of service (HQoS)
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis. A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540 progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines. High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
high definition television (HDTV) high definition-serial digital interface signal (HD-SDI) historical performance data hop hot patch
The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported and stored on the NMS. A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another. A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or queried.
I IANA IC ICC ICMP ICP IDU IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority. See integrated circuit. ITU carrier code See Internet Control Message Protocol. IMA Control Protocol See indoor unit. See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. See Internet Engineering Task Force. See intermediate frequency. See Internet Group Management Protocol. A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See Interior Gateway Protocol. incoming label map See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IGP ILM IMA
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
209
A Glossary
IMA frame
A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group. Internet Protocol A 32-bit (4-byte) binary digit that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated by periods (,), for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of an IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself. See intelligent power adjustment. See Internet Protocol television. See Internet Protocol version 4. See Internet Protocol version 6. See Intermediate System to Intermediate System. integrated services digital network International Organization for Standardization See Internet service provider. internal spanning tree independent transmit clock See International Telecommunication Union. See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector. Interworking Function A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF). A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward datagram or packets through a packet-based network. A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R). An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number
IP IP address
IPA IPTV IPv4 IPv6 IS-IS ISDN ISO ISP IST ITC ITU ITU-T IWF Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP)
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
(ITU-T) Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
"25" deals with packet switched networks. A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. A system in which video is transmitted in IP packets. Also called "TV over IP", IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled TV programs or video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through cable to a TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires either a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode the images in real time. The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork. An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services. Data transmission from the external link to the router for the routers that support the NetStream feature. Description of a performance feature collected from the managed devices by the performance collector. The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services. The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which,
Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet Protocol television (IPTV)
Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
Internet service provider (ISP) inbound indicator indoor unit (IDU)
input jitter tolerance
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
211
A Glossary
when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30-second measurement intervals. insertion loss integrated circuit (IC) The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler, or splice, into a previously continuous path. A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function. A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device performance degrades, or the connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical signals may occur. With IPA, maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the laser sent out from the slice of broken fiber. A process of systematically changing the bit sequence of a digital signal, usually as part of the channel coding, in order to reduce the influence of error bursts that may occur during transmission. The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
intelligent power adjustment (IPA)
interleaving
intermediate frequency (IF) inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA)
J jitter jumper Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability. A connection wire for connecting two pins.
K K byte A general designation of K1 byte and K2 byte in the SDH.
L L2 switching L2VPN LACP LACPDU LAG LAN The switching based on the data link layer. Layer 2 virtual private network See Link Aggregation Control Protocol. Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit See link aggregation group. See local area network.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
212
A Glossary
LAPS LB LBM LBR LC LCAS LCN LCT LDP LED LER LIFO LIU LL LLC LLID LM LOC LOM LOP LOS LP LPA LPF LPT LSP LSR LT LTM LTR LU Layer 2 switching
Link Access Protocol-SDH See loopback. See loopback message. See loopback reply. Lucent connector See link capacity adjustment scheme. local communications network local craft terminal Label Distribution Protocol See light emitting diode. See label edge router. See last in first out. logical interface unit logical link See logical link control. local loopback ID See loss measurement. loss of continuity loss of multiframe loss of pointer See loss of signal. lower order path low order path adaptation See low-pass filter. link-state pass through See label switched path. See label switching router. linktrace See linktrace message. See linktrace reply. line unit A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
213
A Glossary
called Layer 2 switching. Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) label A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad. A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information. Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLS label resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label and the FEC. Then, LSRs sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution. A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain. Value range of the label allocated to peers. A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on common routing mechanisms or through configuration. Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information. A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the license. A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers. The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. linear multiplex section protection An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link.
label distribution
label edge router (LER) label space label switched path (LSP)
label switching router (LSR)
laser
last in first out (LIFO) layer
license
light emitting diode (LED)
line rate linear MSP link aggregation group (LAG)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
214
A Glossary
link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management systems. A mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when the interface detects that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frame seconds reaches or exceeds the specified threshold. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the point of local repair (PLR). When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP. LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2. For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1. The distribution of activity across two or more servers or components in order to avoid overloading any one with too many requests or too much traffic. A device running mode. Two or more hardware units can averagely share the system load based on their processing capabilities when they are operating normally. When a hardware unit fails, the other units fulfill the tasks of the faulty unit on the precondition for guaranteeing system performance, for example, few call loss. A process of importing information from the storage device to the memory to facilitate processing (when the information is data) or execution (when the information is program). An MEP of a device on a network enabled with Ethernet CFM. A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). An interface that does not exist physically and comes into being through configuration. It can also exchange data. According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN). A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop. The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
link monitoring
link protection
linktrace message (LTM)
linktrace reply (LTR)
load balancing load sharing
loading
local MEP local area network (LAN)
logical interface logical link control (LLC)
loopback (LB)
loopback message (LBM)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
215
A Glossary
loopback reply (LBR)
A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending time of LBR. A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a pair of MEPs. No transitions occurring in the received signal. A filter designed to transmit electromagnetic frequencies below a certain value, while excluding those of a higher frequency. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet that contains several subracks. A lower performance limit which when exceeded by a performance event counter will trigger a threshold-crossing event.
loss measurement (LM)
loss of signal (LOS) low-pass filter (LPF) lower subrack lower threshold
M MA MAC MAC address MAC address aging MADM MAN MBS MCF MCR MD MDP ME MEG MEL MEP MFAS MIP MLD MP MPID maintenance association See Media Access Control. A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long. A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received from this device within a specified time period. multiple add/drop multiplexer See metropolitan area network. maximum burst size message communication function minimum cell rate See maintenance domain. message dispatch process See maintenance entity. maintenance entity group maintenance entity group level See maintenance entity group end point. See multiframe alignment signal. See maintenance entity group intermediate point. See multicast listener discovery. maintenance point maintenance point identification
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
216
A Glossary
MPLS MPLS TE MPLS VPN MPLS-TP MS MSA MSB MSOH MSP MST MST region MSTI MSTP MTBF MTIE MTTR MTU MUX Media Access Control (MAC)
See Multiprotocol Label Switching. multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network. See transport profile for multiprotocol label switching. multiplex section multiplex section adaptation most significant bit multiplex section overhead See multiplex section protection. See multiplex section termination. See Multiple Spanning Tree region. See multiple spanning tree instance. See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. See mean time between failures. maximum time interval error See mean time to repair. See maximum transmission unit. See multiplexer. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A protocol used to set up and maintain multicast routes, and to correctly and effectively forward multicast packets. The multicast route is used to set up a loop-free transmission path from the source to multiple receivers, that is, the multicast distribution tree. A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with
Multicast Routing Protocol
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
Multiple Spanning Tree region (MST region)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
217
A Glossary
the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region. Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. A basic component of a human-machine interface. It is the default client interface of the NMS and intuitively displays the structure of a network, NEs on the network, subnets in the network as well as the NE communication and running status, reflecting the overall network running status. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP). An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail. An end point of a MEG, which is able to initialize and stop the transmission of OAM data packets for fault management and performance monitoring. An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond to some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or perform any operations on network connections. The information that is used for network management in a transport network. The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure. The interval for NEs to report measurement results to the Network Management System (NMS). A physical medium for storing computer information. A medium is used for data duplication and keeping the data for some time. Original data can be obtained from a medium. A basic element for forming a dimension according to the hierarchy of each level. Each member represents a data element in a dimension. For example, January 1997 is a typical member of the time dimension. A network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area covered by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is
main topology
maintenance domain (MD) maintenance entity (ME)
maintenance entity group end point (MEP) maintenance entity group intermediate point (MIP) management information maximum transmission unit (MTU)
mean time between failures (MTBF) mean time to repair (MTTR) measurement period medium
member
metropolitan area network (MAN)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
218
A Glossary
also sometimes referred to as a campus network. microwave mirroring monitor link monitoring The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infrared radiation, typically above about 1 mm. The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several computers with identical data. A port association solution developed as a supplementary to smart link. A method that an inspector uses to inspect a service agent. By monitoring a service agent, an inspector can check each detailed operation performed by the service agent during the conversation and operate the GUI used by the service agent. The inspector helps the service agent to provide better service. An auxiliary or associated condition or component of a device. A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network. A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment. A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. A function, which is performed to generate the MSOH during the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction. Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed. A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section. An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing technology and label switching
mounting mounting ear multicast
multicast listener discovery (MLD)
multiframe alignment signal (MFAS) multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI)
multiplex section protection (MSP) multiplex section termination (MST) multiplexer (MUX)
multiplexing
multiprotocol label switching virtual private network (MPLS VPN)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
219
A Glossary
technology. It can be used to construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N N+1 protection NAS NC NE ID NGN NHLFE NLP NM NMC NNI NP NPC NPE NRT-VBR NRZ NRZ code NRZI NSAP NSF NTP NTP client (NC) A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. network access server See NTP client. An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID. See next generation network. next hop label forwarding entry normal link pulse network management network management center network-to-network interface See network processor. See network parameter control. network provider edge non-real-time variable bit rate non-return to zero non-return-to-zero code non-return to zero inverted See network service access point. non-stop forwarding Network Time Protocol A bottom-level device in the time synchronization network. An NTP client obtains time from its upper-level NTP server without providing the time synchronization service. Compared with the top-level NTP server, the middle-level NTP server sometimes is called an NTP client. Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer. During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is
network layer
network parameter control (NPC)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
220
A Glossary
exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface. network processor (NP) An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are commonly used in many different types of equipment and products. A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others. A service that needs to be enabled at the network layer and maintained as a basic service. A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can access OSI network services. A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network connection or configuration problems. A packet-based network aimed to address requirement of various services. It adopts an integrated and open network framework. In NGN, services are separated from call control; call control is separated from bearer. In this way, services are independent of network. NGN can provide various services, such as voice services, data services, multimedia services or the integration of several services. A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the output noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in the input termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise figure is thus the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device itself did not introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio receiver can be specified. See non-gateway network element. A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the gateway NE application layer.
network segment
network service network service access point (NSAP) network storm
next generation network (NGN)
noise figure
non-GNE non-gateway network element (non-GNE)
O O&M OA OADM OAM OAMPDU operation and maintenance optical amplifier See optical add/drop multiplexer. See operation, administration and maintenance. operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
221
A Glossary
OAU OC OCP OCS ODF ODU OFS OHA OHP OLT ONU OPEX OPU OSC OSI OSN OSNR OSPF OTDR OTM OTN OTU OTUk Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
See optical amplifier unit. ordinary clock optical channel protection optical core switching optical distribution frame See outdoor unit. out-of-frame second overhead access overhead processing optical line terminal See optical network unit. operating expense optical channel payload unit See optical supervisory channel. See open systems interconnection. optical switch node See optical signal-to-noise ratio. See Open Shortest Path First. See optical time domain reflectometer. optical terminal multiplexer optical transport network See optical transponder unit. optical channel transport unit-k A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed with the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. Pertaining to the disconnection between a device or a service unit and the system or the network, or no running of a device and service unit. A state indicating that a computer device or program is activated and is ready for operations, and can communicate with a computer or can be controlled by the computer. A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3
offline online
open systems interconnection (OSI)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
through 1 deal with network functions. operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, support activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state, and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction. A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator. A component normally attached to an optical cable or a piece of apparatus to provide frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables. A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection. A component that connects several transmit or receive units. A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to individual subscribers. The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. OSNR = signal power/noise power. A passive component, which is used for splitting and sending optical power to multiple ONUs connected by an optical fiber. In a GPON system that consists of the OLT, ONU, splitter, and optical fibers, according to the split ratio, the optical signal over the optical fiber connected to the OLT is splitted into multiple channels of optical signals and send each channel to each ONU. Split ratio determines how many channels of optical signals an optical fiber can be split to. A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain channel. A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) optical amplifier unit (OAU) optical attenuator
optical connector
optical fiber optical interface optical network unit (ONU) optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) optical splitter
optical supervisory channel (OSC) optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) optical transponder unit (OTU) orderwire outdoor unit (ODU)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
223
A Glossary
P P2MP P2P PA PADR PBS PCB PCM PCR PCS PDH PDU PE PGND cable PHB PIM-DM PIM-SM PKT PLL PM PMD POH POS PPD PPI PPP PPPoE PPS PQ PRBS PRC point-to-multipoint See point-to-point service. power amplifier PPPoE active discovery request See peak burst size. See printed circuit board. See pulse code modulation. See peak cell rate. physical coding sublayer See plesiochronous digital hierarchy. See power distribution unit. See provider edge. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green. See per-hop behavior. Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode partition knowledge table See phase-locked loop. performance monitoring polarization mode dispersion path overhead See packet over SDH/SONET. partial packet discard PDH physical interface Point-to-Point Protocol Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet port protection switching See priority queuing. See pseudo random binary sequence. primary reference clock
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
224
A Glossary
PSD PSN PSTN PSU PT PTI PTN PTP PVC PVID PVP PW PWE3 packet discarding
See power spectrum density. See packet switched network. See public switched telephone network. power supply unit payload type payload type indicator packet transport network Precision Time Protocol permanent virtual channel See port default VLAN ID. See permanent virtual path. See pseudo wire. See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge. A function of discarding the packets from unknown VLAN domain or broadcast packets. Packet Discarding is used to prevent the situation where unknown packets or broadcast packets use the bandwidth on a link, improving the reliability of service transmission. An action performed by a router to forward a received datagram, where the destination IP address does not match the IP address of the router, to another router or destination host on the router list. The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot accept any incoming data at a given moment. A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s or bytes/s. A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode. A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections. Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. A check bit appended to an array of binary digits to make the sum of all the binary digits, including the check bit, always odd or always even. A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits, usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of
packet forwarding
packet loss packet over SDH/SONET (POS) packet rate packet switched network (PSN) packet switching
paired slots parity bit parity check
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
225
A Glossary
1s in the frame and attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted. parts replacement passive mode patch peak burst size (PBS) A maintenance operation of removing a faulty part or a part to be examined from a running device and then installing a new part. A working mode of EFM OAM. An interface in the passive mode cannot initiate the discovery and remote loopback. An independent software unit used for fixing the bugs in software. A parameter that is used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that PBS should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. See also CIR, CBS, and PIR. The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells. BGP speakers that exchange information with each other. IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE). An alarm generated when the actual result of a measurement entity equals the predefined logical expression for threshold or exceeds the predefined threshold. The performance parameters identify some indexes to scale the general performance of the system. The indexes include the number of managed nodes, number of supported clients and log database capacity. The parameters are sorted into static parameters, dynamic parameters and networking bandwidth parameters. The memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historical performance register, 24-hour historical performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics. A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system generates a performance alarm. Virtual path that consists of PVCs. The relative position in time within a single period of a signal. A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency.
peak cell rate (PCR) peer per-hop behavior (PHB)
performance alarm performance parameters
performance register
performance threshold
permanent virtual path (PVP) phase phase-locked loop (PLL)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
226
A Glossary
physical layer
Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking. The link between two physical network elements (NEs). When the user creates NEs or refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according to the topology structure information on the device. The remark information of a physical link can be modified, but the physical link cannot be deleted. A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages. A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP address on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to the data packet of the same size returned from the target host. A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are terminal users. An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported. A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. A set of rules that are applied when the conditions for triggering an event are met. A template that is used to define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example, rating, debiting and accumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be instantiated. They can be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation method, and action functions are carried out. A mechanism for the NMS to query the agent status and other data on a regular basis. A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame carries no VLAN tag when reaching the port. The priority that is used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially. A method for dynamically and properly assigning power according to the real-time status of a wireless network. When an AP runs under an AC for the first time, the AP uses its maximum transmit power. When getting reports from its neighbors (that is, other APs that are detected by the AP and managed by the same AC), the AP determines to increase or decrease its power according to the
physical link
ping ping test
plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) point-to-point service (P2P) pointer
polarization
policy policy template
polling port default VLAN ID (PVID) port priority power adjustment
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
227
A Glossary
report conclusion. power box power control A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. A process in which the MS or BS uses certain rules to adjust and control the transmit power according to the change in the channel condition and the power of the received signal. A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution. A module that provides power supply to other boards or modules. An operation that switches off devices during upgrade or expansion. To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain. A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are processed earlier than others. A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE. A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW. An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS. A variation above or below a normal level and a given duration in electrical energy.
power distribution unit (PDU) power module power off power on power spectrum density (PSD) printed circuit board (PCB) priority queuing (PQ)
private line protection path provider edge (PE)
pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) pseudo wire (PW)
pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
public switched telephone network (PSTN) pulse
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
228
A Glossary
pulse code modulation (PCM)
A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of pulses. Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can change continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several predefined values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog, pulse code modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q QA QAM QPSK QinQ Q adaptation See quadrature amplitude modulation. See quadrature phase shift keying. A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private VLANs. See quality of service. Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message signals, or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of two carrier waves, using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation scheme or amplitude modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two waves, usually sinusoids, are out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus called quadrature carriers or quadrature components hence the name of the scheme. A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER. A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
QoS quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM)
quadrature phase shift keying (QPSK)
quality of service (QoS)
R RADIUS RAI RDI RED REG See Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. remote alarm indication remote defect indication See random early detection. See regenerator.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
229
A Glossary
REI RF RIP RMEP RNC ROPA RP RPR RS232
remote error indication See radio frequency. See Routing Information Protocol. remote maintenance association end point See radio network controller. See remote optical pumping amplifier. rendezvous point resilient packet ring A asynchronous transfer mode that does not involve hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232. See received signal level. regenerator section overhead See received signal strength indicator. regenerator section termination See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. radio transmission node See Real-Time Transport Protocol. An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. A type of host-to-host protocol used in real-time multimedia services such as Voice over IP (VoIP) and video. A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability. restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called
RS422
RSL RSOH RSSI RST RSTP RTN RTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)
RoHS Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
radio frequency (RF)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
230
A Glossary
high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. radio network controller (RNC) radio propagation model A piece of equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources. An empirical mathematical formulation for the characterization of radio wave propagation as a function of frequency, distance and other conditions. A single model is usually developed to predict the behavior of propagation for all similar links under similar constraints. A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented. A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on a physical interface or a Tunnel interface. Rate limiting is directly enabled on the interface to control the traffic passing the interface. A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR), sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time. To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards. The signal level at a receiver input terminal. The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open). Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message. A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference. The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals. An electronic control device that has a control system and a system to be controlled. The relay of the telepresence system is used to control the power of telepresence equipment and is controlled by the telepresence host. A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission. An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount, free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action ensures that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.
random early detection (RED) rate limiting
real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR)
reboot received signal level (RSL) received signal strength indicator (RSSI)
receiver sensitivity recognition reference clock reflectance regeneration
regenerator (REG) relay
remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA)
reservation
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
231
A Glossary
resistance
The ability to impede (resist) the flow of electric current. With the exception of superconductors, all substances have a greater or lesser degree of resistance. Substances with very low resistance, such as metals, conduct electricity well and are called conductors. Substances with very high resistance, such as glass and rubber, conduct electricity poorly and are called nonconductors or insulators. A physical resource belonging to two or more protection subnetworks. A message that is returned to the requester to notify the requester of the status of the request packet. The ability of a system to maintain function even with changes in internal structure or external environment. A return to a previous condition through cancellation of a certain operation. An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet. The determination of a path that a data unit (frame, packet, message) traverses from source to destination. A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should be forwarded. See real-time variable bit rate.
resource sharing response robustness rollback root alarm route
router
routing routing protocol rt-VBR
S S1 byte A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network, each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol. storage area network Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet square connector
SAN SAToP SC
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
232
A Glossary
SCR SD SD trigger flag
sustainable cell rate See signal degrade. A signal degrade trigger flag that determines whether to perform a switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system. See standard definition-serial digital interface signal. See synchronous digital hierarchy. serious disturbance period See synchronous dynamic random access memory. safety extra-low voltage synchronous equipment management function severely errored second SDH equipment timing source See signal fail. small form-factor pluggable See Secure File Transfer Protocol. See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line. side mode suppression ratio subnetwork connection subnetwork connection multipath protection subnetwork connection protection subnetwork connection tunnel protection See Simple Network Management Protocol. See signal-to-noise ratio. section overhead See synchronous optical network. See superstratum provider edge. See Secure Sockets Layer. See Synchronization Status Message. synchronization status message byte synchronization supply unit system target decoder Spanning Tree Protocol switched virtual connection
SD-SDI SDH SDP SDRAM SELV SEMF SES SETS SF SFP SFTP SHDSL SMSR SNC SNCMP SNCP SNCTP SNMP SNR SOH SONET SPE SSL SSM SSMB SSU STD STP SVC
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
233
A Glossary
Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH. A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities. A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals. A service, provided by a layer of communicating open systems, which ensures adequate security of the systems or of data transfer. A function of establishing a replacement connection by network without the network management connection function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time. An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers. An MAC-layer-based unidirectional transmission service. It is used to transmit data packets, and is characterized by a set of QoS parameters, such as latency, jitter, and throughput. The level of service quality of an evaluated party in a specified period, determined by an evaluating party. A measure that ensures that services can be received at the receive end. A logical connection between two nodes on a network for the exchange of data. It generally can apply to any link between any two data devices. A session is also used simply to describe the connection time. A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific defined traffic profile. A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect condition is active. A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end
Synchronization Status Message (SSM)
security
security service self-healing
serial port
service flow
service level service protection session
shaping signal degrade (SD) signal fail (SF)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
234
A Glossary
defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). The information exchange concerning the establishment and control of a telecommunication circuit and the management of the network. A protection operation method that takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (for example, trail, subnetwork connection), in the case of a unidirectional failure. A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide the broadband access service. An antenna intended to radiate or receive radio waves with only one specified polarization. Dividing data into the information units proper for transmission. Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies according to transmission system type. Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
signaling single-ended switching
single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL)
single-polarized antenna slicing smooth upgrade span
standard definition-serial digital interface signal (SD-SDI) static ARP static route
A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IP addresses must be forwarded through this gateway. A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must be changed by the operators. A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH transoceanic multiplex section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the source and sink nodes of a service. The force, or combination of forces, which produces a strain; force exerted in any direction or manner between contiguous bodies, or parts of bodies, and taking specific names according to its direction, or mode of action, as thrust or pressure, pull or tension, shear or tangential stress.
statistical multiplexing
steering
stress
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
235
A Glossary
subnet
A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example, according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router matches with the IP address. Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE devices that are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices. The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the SPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE side and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE. To forbid the printing of the paper bill of an account that meets certain conditions during the bill run. A specific state in the life cycle of a subscriber. A subscriber in this state can neither make calls nor receive calls. The backplane bandwidth or switching bandwidth. The switching capacity is the maximum data that can be processed by the interface processor of a switch and the data bus. The backplane bandwidth indicates the overall data switching capability of a switch, in Gbit/s. A priority of a board that is defined for protection switching. When several protected boards need to be switched, a switching priority should be set for each board. If the switching priorities of the boards are the same, services on the board that fails later cannot be switched. Services on the board with higher priority can preempt the switching resources of that with lower priority. A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than conventional memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus and is capable of running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional FPM RAM, and about twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM is replacing EDO DRAM in computers. A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
subnet mask
superstratum provider edge (SPE)
suppress suspension switching capacity
switching priority
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM)
synchronous optical network (SONET)
T TCA See threshold crossing alarm.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
236
A Glossary
TCI TCM TCN TCP TCP/IP TDC TDM TE TFTP TIM TLV TM TMN TOD TPID TPS TPS protection
tag control information tandem connection monitor topology change notification See Transmission Control Protocol. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol tunable dispersion compensator See time division multiplexing. terminal equipment See Trivial File Transfer Protocol. trace identifier mismatch See type-length-value. See terminal multiplexer. See telecommunications management network. time of day tag protocol identifier See tributary protection switching. The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to the specified protection board and the protection board takes over as the working board. After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically switched to the original board. trail signal degrade trail trace identifier See time to live. See trail termination source identifier. tributary unit tributary unit loss of pointer tributary unit group committed rate measurement interval A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854. type of service The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A
TSD TTI TTL TTSI TU TU-LOP TUG Tc Telnet
ToS Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
237
A Glossary
connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines. A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between them. The common node often leads to single-point failures. A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals. An amount, limit or level on a scale. Changes will occur with a threshold reached. The alarm occurs when the monitored value exceeds the threshold. An alarm generated when a threshold is crossed. The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection, service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth. The data input/output capability of the data transmission interface. A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL value when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. Symbolic representation for a timer object (for example, a timer object may have a primitive designated as T-Start Request). Various MAC entities utilize timer entities that provide triggers for certain MAC state transitions. The current time of an event that is recorded by a computer. By using mechanisms such as the Network Time Protocol (NTP), a computer maintains accurate current time, calibrated to minute fractions of a second. The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is
tail drop
tangent ring telecommunications management network (TMN) terminal multiplexer (TM)
threshold threshold alarm threshold crossing alarm (TCA) throughput
throughput capability time division multiplexing (TDM)
time to live (TTL)
timer
timestamp
token bucket algorithm
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
238
A Glossary
limited, and the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input. topology topology discovery trTCM traceroute The configuration or layout of a network formed by the connections between devices on a local area network (LAN) or between two or more LANs. A technique to accurately determine the exact layout of a network using a few assumptions about the network architecture and simple tools. See two rate three color marker. A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of datagrams with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time exceeded messages that return to determine routers along the path. The product of the number of calls made and received and the average duration of each call in a measurement period. A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently. A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions. A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion. An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks. The statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems, monitor and maintain the networks, and plan the networks. A network level management function of the network management system. This function enables you to configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report. A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the connectivity verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect. A business between a carrier and customer, such as payment and account adjustment. A process of transferring the account balance of an account to another account. A packet is transmitted along an LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the packet is labeled. The intermediate nodes are named transits.
traffic traffic classification
traffic policy traffic shaping
traffic statistics
trail management function
trail termination source identifier (TTSI)
transaction transfer transit
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
239
A Glossary
transit node transmission delay
All the nodes except the master node on an RRPP ring. The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and the equipment forwarding latency. A technical mechanism used within some networking devices in order to prevent too much unwanted interference between different wireless networks. A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase. MPLS-TP is an extension to MPLS in terms of forwarding, OAM, reliability, NMS and control plane protocol standardized by IETF to provide sufficient transport functionality. A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices. A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and inloop. A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary processing boards. Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as speech, data and video signals. A link used to transport VLAN communication between two switches. A switch port used to connect to other switches. The trunk port can connect to only the trunk link. Only VLANs allowed to pass through a trunk port can be configured on the trunk port. A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel. A group of information, including the token, slot number of an outgoing interface, tunnel type, and location method. A type of cable that consists of two independently insulated wires twisted around one another for the purposes of canceling out electromagnetic interference which can cause crosstalk. The number of twists per meter makes up part of the specifications for a given type of cable. The greater the number of twists is, the more crosstalk is reduced. An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or does not exceed the CIR. An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called Code-Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can be added to support new features,
transmit power control transparent transmission transport profile for multiprotocol label switching (MPLS-TP) tray tributary loopback
tributary protection switching (TPS) trunk trunk link trunk port
tunnel
tunnel ID twisted pair cable
two rate three color marker (trTCM)
type-length-value (TLV)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
240
A Glossary
which is flexible in describing information loaded in packets.
U UART UAS UAT UBR UBR+ UDP UNI UPC UPE UPI UPM UPS UTC User Datagram Protocol (UDP) universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter unavailable second See unavailable time event. unspecified bit rate Unspecified Bit Rate Plus See User Datagram Protocol. See user-to-network interface. See usage parameter control. user-end provider edge user payload identifier uninterruptible power module uninterruptible power supply See Coordinated Universal Time. A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagram. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. There is a possibility that UDP messages will be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The destination device does not confirm whether a data packet is received. An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds. The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. A packet for which no forwarding entry is found in the multicast forwarding table. A transmission channel through which radio signals or other signals are transmitted to the central office. GTP Tunnel from the Mobile Node to the SGSN. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. The maximum consumption amount that a carrier sets for a subscriber in a bill cycle. If the consumption amount if a subscriber exceeds the maximum consumption amount that the carrier sets, the OCS still deducts the maximum consumption amount that the carrier sets.
unavailable time event (UAT)
unicast unknown multicast packet uplink uplink tunnel upload upper limit
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
241
A Glossary
upstream upstream board usage parameter control (UPC)
In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link. A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream board, services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device. During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface. The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).
user-to-network interface (UNI)
V V-NNI V-UNI V.24 VAS VB VBR VC trunk VCC VCCV VCG VCI VCTRUNK VIP VLAN VLAN mapping virtual network-network interface See virtual user-network interface. The physical layer interface specification between DTE and DCE defined by the ITU-T. It complies with EIA/TIA-232. See value-added service. virtual bridge See variable bit rate. See virtual container trunk. See virtual channel connection. virtual circuit connectivity verification See virtual concatenation group. virtual channel identifier A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board. very important person virtual local area network A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the destination. One of the properties of the MST region, which describes mappings between VLANs and spanning tree instances. A technology that adds a VLAN tag to each incoming packet. The VLAN stacking technology implements transparent transmission of C-VLANs in the ISP network to realize the application of Layer 2 Virtual Private Network
VLAN mapping table VLAN stacking
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
242
A Glossary
(VPN). VP VPI VPLS VPN VRRP VSI Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) See virtual path. See virtual path identifier. See virtual private LAN service. virtual private network See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. virtual switch interface A protocol used for multicast or multicast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network. See voice over IP. A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers based on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network technologies, computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide value-added services. One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end points. A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or switched virtual circuits (SVCs) . A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs. The fiber that is created between different devices. A virtual fiber represents the optical path that bears SDH services in a WDM system. A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM network based on a common VPI. The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs. A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
VoIP value-added service (VAS)
variable bit rate (VBR)
virtual channel connection (VCC) virtual circuit
virtual concatenation group (VCG) virtual container trunk (VC trunk) virtual fiber virtual path (VP) virtual path identifier (VPI) virtual private LAN service (VPLS) virtual user-network
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
interface (V-UNI) voice over IP (VoIP)
classification and traffic control in HQoS. An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). The voltage developed across a component or conductor by the flow of current through the resistance or impedance of that component or conductor.
voltage drop
W WAN WCDMA WDM WFQ WLAN WRED WRR WTR Web LCT Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) wait to restore (WTR) wavelength wavelength protection group weighted fair queuing (WFQ) See wide area network. See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access. wavelength division multiplexing See weighted fair queuing. See wireless local area network. See weighted random early detection. weighted round robin See wait to restore. The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE management layer of the transport network. A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology. The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line. The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a traveling wave, that is, the distance over which a wave is transmitted within a vibration period. Data for describing the wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet for SDH NEs. The wavelength path protection can work only with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled. A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out
weighted random early detection (WRED) wide area network (WAN)
wireless local area
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
network (WLAN) working path working service wrapping
data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN. A path allocated to transport the normal traffic. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working. A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the node that detects a failure. For details, see ITU-T G.841.
X X.21 X.25 ITU-T standard for serial communications over synchronous digital lines. It is mainly used in Europe and Japan. A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network (PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
Y Y.1731 The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI), Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor Specific (VSP) for fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM).
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
245

OptiX OSN 550 V100R006C01 Product Description V1.1 (20121031)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 550 V100R006C01 Product Description V1.1 (20121031)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service Transmission System V100R006C01

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

About This Document

Network planning engineers Data configuration engineers System maintenance engineers

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Quick Reference ............................................................................................................................ 5 3 System Architecture and Service Access ................................................................................ 16

4 Product Features .......................................................................................................................... 22

5 Hardware and Structure............................................................................................................. 66

6 Networking and Application Scenarios ................................................................................. 79

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7 Network Management System ................................................................................................. 95

8 Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................... 101

9 Security Management............................................................................................................... 116

10 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................ 121

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... 184

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Product Positioning and Features

Product Positioning and Features

About This Chapter

1.1 Product Positioning

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Product Positioning and Features

Figure 1-1 Network application of the OptiX OSN 550

E1/FE/GE ATM/IMA E1 E1/T1 E1/STM-1 FE ATM/IMA E1/GE

OptiX OSN 550

OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II

Enterprise leased service

1.2 Product Features

Universal Switch Architecture and Multi-service Transmission

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Product Positioning and Features

Figure 1-2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 550

TDM/EoS Ethernet PWE3

STM-N Hybrid MSTP architecture Ethernet

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Product Positioning and Features

Figure 1-3 Application of hierarchical OAM

Ethernet Port OAM MEP

OptiX OSN 550/500

OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II

Strong Environmental Adaptability

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Chassis dimensions (H x W x D): 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm

See Table 2-3.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Interface Type External clock port

External time port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet

Power supply port

Three-phase socket RJ45

Network management port

Alarm input/output port

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Packet system performa nce Service